MAY  9  1919 

Logical  sen' 


DS  131  . W66  1919 
Wild,  Joseph,  b.  1834. 
The  lost  ten  tribes 


OBVERSE 


GREAT  SEAL  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

This  device  of  the  Great  Seal  was  adopted  by  act  of  the 
Continental  Congress,  on  June  20th,  1782,  and  re-adopted 
by  the  new  Congress,  September  15th,  1789.  The  act  pro¬ 
vided  for  an  obverse  and  a  reverse ,  as  set  forth  in  this 
plate;  the  reverse  is  not  used.  This  is  a  plate  of  the  first 
and  original  Seal,  which,  by  use,  has  been  worn  out.  The 
one  now  in  use  is  the  second;  it  differs  from  the  first  in  that, 
by  an  accident,  seven  arrows  were  left  out  of  the  eagle’s 
talon. 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION. 


- 0 - 

The  following  Discourses  are  presented  to  the  public  in  book 
form,  in  response  to  the  request  of  numerous  friends. 
The  reader  will  remember,  however,  that  the  vast  subject  of 
which  they  treat  cannot  be  fairly  and  completely  presented 
in  such  a  volume  as  this.  Also,  it  should  be  borne  in  mind, 
that  the  language  style,  and  structure,  are  sermonic. 

When  I  first  entered  the  ministry,  I  made  up  my  mind  that 
I  would  try  and  thoroughly  understand  the  Scriptures.  I  soon 
found  that  a  large  portion  was  of  a  prophetic  nature.  I  set  to 
work  according  to  the  usual  method,  but  to  my  sorrow  I  soon 
discovered  that  the  method  and  rules  in  general  use  for  Scrip¬ 
ture  exegesis,  were  very  defective  and  unsatisfactory.  .  The 
fact  was  forced  upon  me  that  the  true  method,  or  key  of  inter¬ 
pretation,  was  not  in  use.  I  was  always  persuaded  that  the 
Bible  was  a  unit,  and  that  the  principles  contained  in  such 
a  unit  were  beautifully  related ;  and  because  of  such  a.  faith, 

I  wondered  more  and  more  as  I  grew  older  why  we  had  not 
a  better  key  of  interpretation.  Men  spiritualised  at  random, 
without  any  kind  of  a  rule,  except  their  own  fancy.  In  this 
manner  they  expounded  the  material  history  of  the  Old  Testa¬ 
ment.  The  whole  arrangement  was  a  Babel. 

I  had  faintly  discerned  that  the  Scriptures  made  a  distinction 
between  the  House  of  Israel  and  the  House  of  Judah,  and  that 
the  prophecies  belonging  to  one  could  not,  in  fairness,  be  ap¬ 
plied  to  the  other;  and  that  some  prophecies  applied  to  both. 
It  always  seemed  strange  to  me,  that  the  people  which  God 
said  He  had  chosen  for  Himself,  should  not  be  known.  The 
Jews  were  always  known,  but  where  was  Israel,  His  inherit¬ 
ance”?  Just  at  this  point  of  my  experience  I  came  across  a 
book,  entitled  “Our  Israelitish  Origin,”  by  the  late  John  Wil¬ 
son,  the  reading  of  which  confirmed  me  in  my  convictions,  and 
aided  me  to  a  better  knowledge  of  the  good  Book  of  Provi- 
dence. 

After  some  twenty  years  of  experience,  I  began  to  teach  the 
principles  of  interpretation  embodied  in  these  Discourses.  The 
public  were  interested  and  profited  with  the  same,  as  was 
manifest  from  the  large  and  constant  attendance  thereon.  By 
personal  interviews  and  letters,  I  have  been  gratified  to  learn 
that  many  have  been  savingly  and  truly  converted  to  God 
through  these  Discourses.  Especially  has  this  been  the  case 
with  those  who  were  infidel  in  faith  and  action  towards  God 
and  His  Word. 

For  years  I  have  also  been  greatly  interested  in  Pyramid- 
ology,  in  the  teachings  of  the  Great  Pyramid  at  Gizeh  in  Egypt. 
If  one  wants  to  go  further  and  be  specially  informed  on  Pyra- 
midology,  why,  let  them  get  “Our  Inheritance  in  the  Great 
Pyramid,”*  a  work  by  Professor  Piazzi  Smyth,  Astronomer- 
Royal  of  Scotland.  To  this  man  God  has  given  a  fine  mind 


IV 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION. 


and  a  large  heart  for  a  special  place  and  work.  But  what 
pleases  me  above  all,  is  that  this  Pyramid,  being  the  Lord’s 
pillar,  and  His  witness,  should  so  finely  tally  with  the  Scrip¬ 
tures  and  Providence,  that  the  teachings  of  this  monument 
are  in  harmony  with  the  principles  of  interpretation,  as  applied 
to  the  prophecies  in  these  Discourses. 

The  illustration  of  the  ragged  old  stone,  called  Jacob’s  Pil¬ 
lar,  is  not  very  distinct,  but  it  will  aid  the  reader  in  forming 
a  better  idea.  The  stone  in  shape  is  an  oblong  square,  about  32 
inches  long,  13  broad,  and  11  inches  deep.  At  each  end  is  an 
iron  ring,  much  worn  and  rusted.  It  is  a  bluish  steel.-like 
colour,  mixed  with  some  veins  of  red.  It  has  been  in  its 
present  resting-place  over  600  years. 

The  main  idea  I  wish  to  convey  in  this  book,  is  that  God  is 
conducting  His  Providence  through  His  ancient  chosen  peo¬ 
ple,  Israel,  whom  I  believe  are  found  in  the  Saxon  race.  And 
His  throne  on  earth,  through  which  flow  the  purposes  of  Provi¬ 
dence,  is  David’s  throne,  which  I  believe  to  be  at  present  the 
English  throne.  The  United  States  fulfills  the  role  of  the 
Tribe  of  Manasseh.  Therefore,  to  understand  the  prophecies, 
Providence,  and  the  present  movements  of  nations,  as  well  as 
the  future  lot  and  destiny  of  each,  we  must  read  the  Scriptures 
in  this  light.  God  has  made  the  children  of  Israel  and  throne 
of  David  His  executive,  in  time,  on  earth.  They  are  His 
'executive  for  civilisation,  evangelisation,  order,  and  conquest. 
Through  them  God  will  conquer  the  world  to  an  universal 
peace.  As  Moses  was  to  God,  so  is  Israel.  Moses  being  a 
Divine  executor,  was  to  the  people  a  god — so  is  Israel  to  all 
mankind.  Spiritual  Israel  will  come  through  literal  Israel.  I 
send  forth  this  book  with  a  pure  desire  that  it  may  do  good. 

Brooklyn,  May  1st,  1879.  Joseph  Wild. 

— - o - 

PUBLISHER’S  NOTE. 

The  need  of  the  hour  is  the  revealing  of  Spiritual  Israel  which 
Dr.  Wild  saw  more  than  forty  years  ago  would  come  through 
literal  Israel.  How  soon  the  author’s  prophetic  words  will  be 
fulfilled  depends  upon  how  soon  literal  Israel  wakes  to  the 
recognition  of  that  which  alone  will  satisfy.  Israel  must  be 
reconciled  to  her  God.  That  reconciliation  can  come  only- 
through  the  understanding  of  His  will.  That  understanding 
and  the  “will  to  do  His  will”  will  appease  the  hunger,  and 
quiet  the  universal  unrest  and  bring  about  the  true  brother¬ 
hood,  first,  of  the  individual  then  as  a  consequence  of  nations. 

May  all  who  read  this  book  see  and  respond  to  the  spiritual 
insight  that  pervades  it. 

A  list  of  books  on  the  Great  Pyramid  may  be  had  from  the  Pub¬ 
lisher  of  this  book. 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 

Br  JOSEPH  WILD,  D.D. 


Discourse  I. — Key  Distinctions. 

“We  have  also  a  more  sure  word  of  prophecy;  whereunto  ye  do 
well  that  ye  take  heed,  as  unto  a  light  that  shineth  in  a  dark 
place,  until  the  day  dawn,  and  the  day  star  arise  in  your  hearts. 
Knowing  this  first,  that  no  prophecy  of  the  Scripture  is  of  any 
private  interpretation.” — 1  Peter  i.  19,  20. 

I  am  about  to  give  you  a  few  Discourses  on  Prophecy,  and  in 
doing  so  I  desire,  in  the  first  place,  to  point  out  to  you  a  few 
very  important  distinctions  included  in  the  prophecies.  Sup¬ 
pose  the  Bible  to  be  a  great  palace,  with  its  royalty,  royal 
children,  servants,  and  subjects.  You  desire  to  go  through  it 
and  view  it  intelligently,  and  to  understand  all  about  its  inhabi¬ 
tants  and  laws  of  government ;  now  to  do  so  you  must  have 
keys,  and  you  must  learn  who  is  who,  their  place,  authority,  and 
work.  If  not  so  qualified,  you  could  not  pass  from  room  to 
room,  and  you  might  confound  the  King  with  some  servant 
and  visitors  might  be  mistaken  for  the  children  of  the  house¬ 
hold.  Thus  your  ideas  would  be  considerably  mixed;  you 
would  be  guilty  of  talking  about  the  King  when  you  really 
meant  some  servant,  and  of  prophesying  for  the  royal  children 
in  the  name  of  the  visitors.  The  years  would  come  and  go, 
but  events  would  not  happen  as  you  had  prophesied.  Each 
generation  would  take  your  report  and  follow  in  your  foot¬ 
steps,  thus  confusion  and  disappointment  would  keep  pace  with 
the  passing  generations. 

What  is  here  made  a  matter  of  supposition  has  been  a 
solemn  fact  on  the  line  of  human  experience.  Men  have 
studied  the  Bible  and  Providence  in  this  ignorant  and  confused 
way.  Theologians  have  thrown  aside  all  restraints,  and  well- 
defined  limitations  and  distinctions  of  the  Bible  in  their 
assumed  liberty  of  expounding  _  and  spiritualising  the  same. 
No  matter  to  them  that  there  is  a  God-revealed  distinction 
between  Judah  and  Israel,  Manasseh  and  Ephraim,  Samaritans 
and  Gentiles,  and  the  throne  of  David  and  the  throne  of  the 
heathen.  Writers  and  speakers  are  guilty  of  using  the  words 
Judah  and  Israel  in  a  synonymous  sense,  though  the  words 
stand  for  different  people,  history,  and  prophecies,  soon  after 
the  descendants  of  Jacob  settled  in  Palestine.  To  aid  you  in 
seeing  this  historical  confusion  and  folly,  let  me  call  your 
attention  to  them  separately. 


6 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


Judah. 

What  does  this  word  stand  for  in  the  Bible?  In  the  first 
place  it  is  the  name  of  the  fourth  son  of  Jacob.  In  the  second 
place  it  was  the  name  of  his  direct  descendants  or  Tribe.  In 
the  third  place  it  became  the  name  of  the  portion  of  the  country 
occupied  by  this  Tribe  in  the  Promised  Land.  In  the  fourth 
place  it  became  the  name  of  a  kingdom  and  government;  this 
fourth  name  included  the  Tribe  of  Benjamin  and  their  terri¬ 
tory.  In  the  fifth  place  it  became  the  name  of  the  whole 
country  of  Palestine,  and  is  now  often  so  used.  To-day  this 
word  stands  for  those  we  call  Jews,  who,  as  they  allow  among 
themselves,  represent  and  only  include  Judah  and  Levi. 

On  the  death  of  Solomon  the  country  and  Tribes  finally 
separated  into  two  Houses,  kingdoms,  and  governments.  Nine 
Tribes  went  with  Jeroboam,  and  three  with  Rehoboam — name¬ 
ly,  Judah,  Levi,  and  Benjamin.  The  nine-tribed  House  was 
called  Israel,  the  three-tribed  House  Judah.  This  separation 
was  about  975  b.c.  (1  Kings  xii.).  From  that  day  to  this  these 
two  Houses  have  never  been  united ;  but  they  are  to  be,  as 
scores  of  statements  to  that  effect  are  in  the  good  Book  (Hosea 

1.  ii).  About  580  b.c.  the  House  of  Judah  was  taken  captive 
into  Babylon,  remaining  70  years,  then  they  returned  to  their 
own  land,  and  remained  till  the  year  of  our  Lord  70,  when 
Jerusalem  was  destroyed  and  they  were  scattered. 

Prophecies  referring  to  the  Jews  are  numerous  and  in 
striking  contrast  to  those  that  refer  to  Israel.  1.  The  Jews 
were  to  be  a  scattered  people.  2.  A  specially  persecuted  peo¬ 
ple.  3.  To  be  without  a  nationality.  4.  To  be  without  govern¬ 
ment.  5.  Not  to  be  owners  of  landed  property,  though  they 
will  have  money,  until  toward  the  latter  days.  6.  They  were 
to  be  a  proverb.  7.  They  were  to  be  few  in  number.  8.  They 
are  to  retain  a  special  type  of  features.  9.  They  were  to  be 
repeatedly  robbed.  10.  They  were  to  reject  Christ.  11.  To 
retain  the  Mosaic  service  till  returned  to  their  own  land.  12. 
They  are  to  keep  their  name,  and  many  such  distinctions,  none 
of  which  should  be  applied  to  Israel.  All  these  things  have 
been  and  are  fulfilled,  or  fulfilling,  and  though  men  are 
wonderfully  given  to  spiritualising,  few  if  any,  venture  to 
spiritualise  Judah’s  curses.  Men  and  ministers  calling  them¬ 
selves  Gentiles,  are  rude  enough  to  spiritualise  the  blessings  of 
Judah,  and  stealing  them,  apply  them  to  themselves. 

Israel. 

1.  A  name  given  to  Jacob  after  wrestling  with  the  Angel. 

2.  A  term  applied  sometimes  to  all  the  descendants  of  Jacob. 

3.  In  a  spiritual  sense,  those  who  believe  in  Christ.  4.  A  name 
that  covered  and  included  the  nine  Tribes  which  went  with 
Jeroboam  and  formed  the  kingdom  of  Israel.  They  remained 
a  distinct  kingdom,  and  till  now  a  nationality.  From  975  to 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS 


7 


725  b.c.,  they  had  some  nineteen  kings.  They  were  finally 
carried  captive  into  Assyria  by  Shalmaneser  (2  Kings  xvii.). 
From  that  captivity  they  have  never  returned;  as  a  body  they 
never  can,  only  representatives,  as  stated  in  Jer.  iii.  14,  “One  of 
a  city,  and  two  of  a  family.” 

Now  prophecy  points  out  that  it  was  Israel  that  was  to  be 
lost  for  a  while,  and  come  to  light  in  the  latter  day.  They  are 
known  in  the  Scriptures  in  contradistinction  from  others  by 
such  terms  as  the  following:  “ All  Israel,”  “All  the  House  of 
Israel  wholly,”  “The  House  of  Israel,”  “ Men  of  Israel,”  and 
God  calls  them  His  “Servants,  Witnesses,  Chosen  People,  In¬ 
heritance,  and  Seed.”  The  lot,  course,  and  providential  portion 
of  this  people  are  very  marked  from  any  other,  especially  from 
the  Jew,  with  whom  they  are  so  often  confounded.  The  his¬ 
tory  of  the  two  peoples  have  been  wide  apart  and  as  different 
as  they  well  could  be. 

1.  They  were  to  be  lost.  2.  They  were  to  be  divorced  from 
the  Mosaic  law.  3.  They  were  to  lose  their  name.  4.  They 
were  to  lose  their  language.  5.  They  were  to  possess  the  isles 
of  the  sea,  coasts  of  the  earth,  waste  and  desolate  places,  to 
inherit  the  portion  of  the  Gentiles,  their  seed,  land,  and  cities. 
6.  They  were  to  be  great  and  successful  colonisers.  7.  Before 
them  other  people  are  to  die  out.  8.  They  are  to  be  a  head 
nation.  9.  To  be  a  company  of  nations.  10.  To  be  great  in 
war  on  land  or  sea.  11.  To  be  lenders  of  money.  12.  To  have 
a  monarchy.  13.  To  be  keepers  of  the  Sabbath.  14.  To  have. 
David’s  throne  and  seed  ruling  over  them.  15.  They  are  to 
possess  Palestine,  and  invite  their  brethren  of  Judah  to  return. 
And  thus  I  might  repeat  some  sixty  positive  marks  and  dis¬ 
tinctions  setting  forth  Israel;  and  yet  men  wilfully  persist  in 
confounding  them  with  the  Jews,  or  looking  for  this  great  and 
favoured  people  of  the  Lord  among  the  lowest  of  human  kind, 
Indians,  Africans,  and  so  on. 

Samaritans. 

The  Samaritans  were  not  Jews  or  Israelites,  strictly  speak¬ 
ing.  They  of  course  became  Jewish  in  their  customs  and  wor¬ 
ship.  Originally  they  were  Assyrians.  When  the  nine  tribes 
were  carried  captive,  they  were  brought  and  put  in  their  place. 
“And  the  King  of  Assyria  brought  them  from  Babylon  and 
from  Cuthah,  and  from  Ava,  and  from  Hamath,  and  from 
Sepharvaim,  and  placed  them  in  the  cities  of  Samaria,  instead 
of  the  children  of  Israel”  (2  Kings  xvii.  24).  The  Jews  and 
the  Samaritans  never  wholly  mixed ;  one  was  always  distaste¬ 
ful  to  the  other.  They  never  were  taken  captive,  and  to  this 
day  they  live  in  and  about  Mount  Scychar,  numbering  between 
three  and  four  hundreds. 

Benjamin. 

The  Tribe  of  Benjamin  has  a  singular  and  special  place  in 


8 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


the  history  of  Israel  and  Judah.  Neither  the  Old  or  New 
Testament  can  be  well  understood  unless  one  understands  the 
place  of  this  tribe  in  Providence.  They  were  always  counted 
one  of  the  Ten  Tribes,  and  reckoned  with  them  in  the  pro¬ 
phetic  visions.  They  were  only  loaned  to  Judah  about  800 
years.  Read  1  Kings  xi.  They  were  to  be  a  light  for  David  in 
Jerusalem.  God,  forseeing  that  the  Jews  would  reject  Christ, 
kept  back  this  one  Tribe  to  be  in  readiness  to  receive  Him, 
and  so  they  did.  At  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  they  escaped 
and  after  centuries  of  wanderings  turn  up  as  the  proud  and 
haughty  Normans.  Finally,  they  unite  with  the  other  Tribes 
under  William  the  Conqueror.  A  proper  insight  into  the  work 
and  mission  of  Benjamin  will  greatly  aid  one  in  interpreting 
the  New  Testament.  He  was  set  apart  as  a  missionary  Tribe, 
and  at  once  set  to  work  to  spread  the  Gospel  of  Jesus.  Most 
of  the  disciples  were  Benjaminites.  Then,  after  800  years  of 
fellowship  with  Judah,  they  were  cut  loose  and  sent  after  their 
brethren  of  the  House  of  Israel.  It  was  needful  that  the  Lion 
and  the  Unicorn  should  unite. 

Manasseh  and  Ephraim. 

The  history  of  these  two  representative  characters  is  worth 
your  careful  study.  The  whole  of  the  circumstances  of  Jacob 
blessing  them  must  be  accepted  as  Divinely  directed.  Manasseh 
was  to  be  a  great  people,  and  so  I  believe  he  is.  In  the 
United  States  I  find  this  promise  literally  fulfilled.  This  is  the 
Key  to  the  settlement  of  this  land;  to  the  agitations  of  the 
Pilgrims  and  Puritans  in  England.  The  mission,  work,  and 
place  of  the  United  States  may  be  found  in  the  prophecies 
relating  to  this  Tribe.  Let  anyone  examine  the  great  seal  of 
the  United  States,  and  study  its  design,  and  surprise  will  fill 
the  mind  that  facts,  Providence,  and  prophecies  do  so  wonder¬ 
fully  agree.  Take  the  obverse  side.  Here  you  have  an  eagle 
with  outstretched  wings ;  the  bird  is  perfect,  not  double-headed 
and  deformed,  as  in  other  cases  where  the  eagle  has  been  or 
is  the  national  bird.  The  striped  escutcheon  on  its  breast,  in 
its  beak  a  scroll  inscribed  with  a  motto,  ‘E  plnrbus  Unnm” — 
one  out  of  many,  as  Manasseh  was,  and  as  the  country  is  build¬ 
ing  up  a  grand  nationality  and  oneness  out  of  all  nations  nearly. 
Over  the  head  of  the  eagle  there  is  a  glory — the  parting  of 
clouds  by  light;  in  the  opening  appear  thirteen  stars  forming 
a  constellation  argent,  on  an  azure  field.  In  the  dexter  or  right 
talon  is  an  olive  branch  a  symbol  of  peace ;  in  the  sinister  or 
left  talon  is  a  bundle  of  thirteen  arrows.  But  it  is  on  the  re¬ 
verse  side  of  the  great  seal  that  we  have  a  wonder.  Here  we 
have  an  unfinished  Pyramid ;  a  portion  of  the  top  is  gone,  ex¬ 
actly  the  same  as  the  Great  Pyramid  of  Egypt  is  at  this  day. 
Anticipating  this  very  day  (Isa.  xix.  19)  :  “In  that  day  shall 
there  be  an  altar  to  the  Lord.  And  it  shall  be  for  a  sign  and 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS 


9 


for  a  witness  unto  the  Lord  of  hosts  in  the  land  of  Egypt. 
Now  it  is  somewhat  singular  that  the  Congress  of  1782  should 
have  adopted  so  remarkable  a  sign,  one  that  would  witness 
to  God  and  tell  of  their  origin.  The  reverse  side  is  the  under 
side,  and  shows  from  whence  the  nation  came,  and  on  what  it 
is  built.  In  the  zenith — that  is,  above  the  top  of  the  Pyra¬ 
mid — is  a  triangle  surrounded  by  a  glory ;  and  in  the  centre  is 
an  all-seeing  eye.  Over  the  eye  we  have  Annuit  Coeptis,  which 
means,  “He  prospers  our  beginning.”  On  the  base  of  the  Pyra¬ 
mid  we  have  in  letters,  1776,  and  underneath  the  following 
motto—' “Novus  or  do  seclorum”  meaning  a  “New  era  in  the 
ages.  ”  The  suggestion  of  the  items  upon  the  great  seal  was 
from  Sir  John  Prestwich,  Bart.,  an  Englishman.  He  gave  the 
suggestions  to  the  American  Minister,  John  Adams,  and  thus 
the  same  were  conveyed  to  the  Congress  and  adopted.. 

We  have  in  the  facts  of  the  great  seal  a  series  of  coincidents 
that  connect  this  country  with  the  Tribe  of  Manasseh.  When 
the  Tribes  marched,  Benjamin,  Ephraim,  and  Manasseh  went 
together  on  the  West  side  of  the  ark,  for  their  homes  were 
Westward.  On  their  battalion  banner  was  the  figure  of  a  youth, 
denoting  activity,  with  the  motto,  “The  cloud  of  Jehovah  rest 
on  them,  even  when  they  go  forth  out  of  the  camp.  Plere 
we  have  the  origin  of  the  cloud  on  the  seal.  And  when  we 
remember  that  Manasseh  was  brought  up  at  the  foot  of  the 
Pyramid,  and  could  see  it  from  his  palace  home  at  Memphis, 
then  we  get  a  cue  to  the  figure  of  the  Pyramid  on  the  seal  * 

The  Pyramid. 

The  Pyramid  is  a  wonderful  witness  for  God  and  His  people. 
This  building  in  Egypt  has  stood  for  upwards  of  4,000  years , 
finished  and  complete,  it  stood  for  about  3,000  before  anybody 
ventured  to  find  a  way  into  it.  lhen,  at  a  great  cost  of  men, 
money,  and  time,  a  way  was  forced  in  by  an  Arab  chief.  There 
surely  is  something  remarkable  that  the  only  thing  found  in  it 
should  be  a  stone  trough,  and  more  singular  to  my  mind,  that 
the  Ark  of  the  Covenant  and  this  stone  trough  should  be  of 
equal  capacity ;  and  the  laver  in  which  the  priest  washed  his 
feet  in  the  temple  was  exactly  of  the  same  size.  And  Solo¬ 
mon’s  molten  sea  contained  just  as  much  water  as  would  fill  the 
King’s  chamber  in  which  this  trough  was  found.  Can  any 
man  know  these  things  and  believe  them  to  be  accidental? 
Verily  not.  They  do  most  assuredly  pledge  a  God  and  Provi¬ 
dence. 

EPHRAIM. 

This  word  is  not  only  the  name  of  Joseph’s  son  and  the 
Tribe,  but  it  is  used  quite  frequently  in  a  generic  sense,  and 

*Essay  on  “Manasseh  and  the  United  States,”  by  the  author,  now 
out  of  print. 


10 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


stands  for  the  Ten  Tribes  and  Manasseh.  To  Reuben  by  birth¬ 
right  was  the  lead  politically,  but  it  was  taken  from  him  and 
given  to  Joseph,  and  so  to  Ephraim.  From  Judah  came  the 
Chief  Ruler — that  is,  Christ ;  but  the  birthright  was  Joseph’s 
(1  Chron.  v.  1). 

THRONE  OF  DAVID. 

To  this  throne  God  pledged  under  oath  a  perpetuity.  Also 
He  pledged  that  some  one  of  David’s  seed  should  always  be  on 
it.  The  throne  and  seed  are  pledged  an  unconditional  exist¬ 
ence.  This  being  so,  it  follows  that  they  must  be  now  in 
existence,  and  that  finally  all  thrones  will  be  swallowed  up  by 
this  one.  Queen  Victoria  is  of  David,  and  the  English  throne 
is  David’s.  Hence  all  the  promises  and  prophecies  referring  to 
David’s  throne  may  be  found  on  this  line.  For  prophecy  not 
being  of  private  interpretation  such  facts  may  be  proven. 

GENTILES. 

The  word  Gentile  generally  embraces  all  those  nations  and 
people  outside  of  the  Twelve  Tribes.  Keeping  these  few  dis¬ 
tinctions  in  mind  you  will  be  enabled  to  read  the  Bible  inter¬ 
estingly  and  with  the  proper  understanding.  Prophetic  evi¬ 
dence  is  a  strong  kind  of  proof.  Study  the  Word  on  this  line 
and  you  will  find  Providence  and  history  lending  glorious  con¬ 
firmation  to  the  same. 


Discourse  II. — Ti-ie  Promise:  Israel — The  Gates. 

Israel — How  the  Gates  of  His  Enemies  are  to  be  Given  Him — 
By  this  Sign  Lost  Israel  may  be  Known — The  Giving  will 
Correspond  to  the  Multiplying — The  Promise,  in  This 
Day,  is  Rapidly  Fulfilling — England,  Disraeli  and  “Tan- 
cred ”  and  Russia. 

“That  in  blessing  I  will  bless  thee,  and  in  multiplying  I  will  mul¬ 
tiply  thy  seed  as  the  stars  of  the  heaven,  and  as  the  sand  which  is 
upon  the  seashore;  and  thy  seed  shall  possess  the  gate  of  his 
enemies.” — Gen.  xxii.  17. 

Under  a  Divine  oath  was  this  prophetic  promise  made  to 
Abraham.  At  the  time  it  was  given  Abraham  had,  by  com¬ 
mand,  offered  his  only  son  Isaac,  which  offering,  to  all  human 
appearance,  would  leave  the  old  patriarch  again  childless;  but 
his  faith  staggered  not,  for  human  incompetence  does  not 
circumscribe  the  bond  of  Divine  sufficience.  The  God  who 
commanded  Abraham  to  offer,  recalled  the  command  at  a  cer¬ 
tain  stage  of  the  fulfilment,  counting  the  faith  of  Abraham  for 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES 


11 


righteousness.  In  Abraham’s  faith  Isaac  was  really  sacrificed ; 
hence  the  Divine  approval :  “By  Myself  have  I  sworn,  saith 
the  Lord,  for  because  thou  hast  done  this  thing,  and  hast  not 
withheld  thy  son,  thine  only  son,  that  in  blessing  I  will  bless 
thee,  and  in  multiplying  I  will  multiply  thy  seed  as  the  stars 
of  the  heaven,  and  as  the  sand  which  is  upon  the  seashore; 
and  thy  seed  shall  possess  the  gate  of  his  enemies.”  An  oath 
with  men  in  this  day  does  not  mean  in  the  way  of  con¬ 
firmation,  but  not  so  with  God’s  oath.  An  oath  ought  to  be 
sacred,  and  should  be  the  end  of  doubt  and  strife.  God  made 
a  promise  to  Abraham,  and  because  He  could  swear  by  no 
greater,  He  sware  by  Himself.  And  Abraham  lived  to  see  the 
promise  begin  to  fulfil,  and  to-day  the  heirs  of  Abraham  may 
look  and  see  the  same  promise  fulfilling,  for,  as  Paul  says  in 
Heb.  vi.  17 :  “Wherein  God,  willing  more  abundantly  to  show 
unto  the  heirs  of  promise  the  immutability  of  His  counsel, 
confirmed  it  by  an  oath.” 

Who  are  the  heirs  of  promise?  For  to  them  belong  many 
and  precious  promises,  both  spiritual  and  temporal.  Spiritually, 
they  are  to  lead  and  be  responsible  for  the  evangelization  of 
the  world.  Temporally,  they  are  to  be  a  numerous  seed,  a 
powerful  people.  They  are  to  occupy  the  ends  of  the  earth, 
the  uttermost  parts  of  the  earth,  the  coasts  of  the  earth,  the 
waste  and  the  desolate  places  of  the  earth,  the  isles  of  the  sea, 
the  heathen,  as  an  inheritance.  They  are  to  inherit  the  Gentiles, 
and  make  the  desolate  cities  to  be  inhabited ;  they  are  to  be  the 
chief  of  nations;  they  are  to  be  a  company  of  nations;  they 
are  to  be  a  great  people;  they  are  to  possess  the  gates  of  their 
enemies.  Surely  such  a  people  should  be  found,  for  all  these 
things  make  it  impossibel  for  them  to  be  hid  in  a  corner.  One 
cannot  help  saying  with  the  Psalmist :  “Blessed  is  the  nation 
whose  God  is  the  Lord :  and  the  people  whom  He  hath  chosen 
for  His  own  inheritance.” 

In  the  English  Court  of  Chancery  are  vast  sums  of  money, 
large  fortunes  waiting  for  heirs.  The  court  frequently  adver¬ 
tises  for  them  and  many  in  every  land  respond  and  are  eager  to 
prove  their  claims ;  they  are  anxious  to  be  known  and  accepted 
as  the  descendants  and  lawful  heirs  of  certain  testators.  It  is 
oftentimes  difficult  to  establish  their  claims  and  prove  satis¬ 
factorily  their  identity.  The  court  demands  that  the  evidences 
of  heirship  be  very  definite.  In  this  they  are  right.  But  we 
venture  to  say  that  even  the  English  Court  of  Chancery  would 
not  turn  away  a  claimant  who  had  all  the  distinct  marks  and 
abounding  evidence  of  identity  that  mark  and  characterize  the 
children  of  Abraham,  especially  so  in  the  latter  day,  for  then 
these  characteristics  art  to  be  clearer  and  fuller. 

The  Jews  are  known;  they  have  been  known  all  down  the 
centuries;  they  have  not  been  able  to  hide  themselves.  In 
keeping  with  the  Word  of  God  they  have  fulfilled  up  to  the 
present  time  the  prophecies  attaching  to  them.  In  all  the 


12 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


world  they  are  estimated  to  number  some  eleven  millions.  The 
Jews  include  the  children  of  Judah  and  Levi ;  these  Two  Tribes 
only.  The  Jews  themselves  consent  to  this  statement,  and  al¬ 
low  that  the  descendants  of  Reuben,  Simeon,  Zebulun,  Issachar, 
Dan,  Gad,  Asher,  Naphtali,  Joseph  and  Benjamin,  are  lost,  but 
not  extinct.  They  are  in  the  world,  for  God  has  not  cast  away 
His  people  for  ever.  If  the  Two  Tribes  give  us  eleven  millions, 
how  many  should  we  expect  the  Ten  Tribes  to  furnish?  Most 
certainly  not  less  than  forty-five  millions.  To  the  Ten  Tribes 
the  special  promises  of  fruitfulness  were  given.  To  the  Ten 
Tribes  belong  a  greater  portion  of  prophecy;  and  in  the  history 
of  the  world  more  is  allotted  to  Israel  than  to  Judah.  Indeed, 
the  world’s  history  pivots  on  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes. 

I  believe  you  know  the  God-revealed  distinction  between  the 
words  Israel  and  Judah.  You  know  that  they  have  a  distinct 
history.  Their  place  and  work,  promises  and  blessings,  chas¬ 
tisements  and  rebukes,  are  as  distinct  and  different  as  silver 
and  gold. 

The  spiritual  heirs  of  Abraham  are  all  who  are  embraced  in 
the  saving  and  atoning  covenant  of  grace  in  Christ.  I  do  not 
say  all  who  believe,  for  there  will  be  more  in  heaven  without 
faith  than  those  with — namely,  all  those  who  have  died  before 
the  years  of  responsibility,  with  many  of  the  Pagan  world  who, 
never  having  heard  of  the  Saviour,  have  therefore  never  denied 
Him.  In  a  spiritual  sense,  they  are  children.  I  believe  in  this 
matter  with  Paul,  who  says,  when  writing  to  the  Romans,  chap, 
ii. :  “There  is  no  respect  of  person^with  God ;  for  as  many  as 
have  sinned  without  law  shall  also  perish  without  law,  and  as 
many  as  have  sinned  in  the  law  shall  be  judged  by  the  law. 
For  when  the  Gentiles,  which  have  not  the  law,  do  by  nature 
the  things  contained  in  the  law,  these,  having  not  the  law,  are 
a  law  unto  themselves ;  which  show  the  work  of  the  law  writ¬ 
ten  in  their  hearts,  their  conscience  also  bearing  witness, 
and  their  thoughts  the  meanwhile  accusing,  or  else  excusing 
one  another.”  Thus,  under  the  law  which  governs  the  Pagan, 
I  presume  many  will  be  saved  and  many  lost,  just  as  under  the 
law  of  the  Gospel.  In  Abraham  all  nations  will  be  blessed, 
spiritually.  In  this  sense  Abraham’s  seed  embraces  persons  of 
every  age,  clime  and  race. 

But  who  are  the  seed  of  Abraham  according  to  the  flesh? 
We  answer,  the  descendants  of  the  Twelve  Tribes.  Now  to  the 
natural  seed  the  Bible  assigns  a  distinct  work  and  place.  This 
natural  seed  is  divided  in  the  Bible,  the  word  Israel  standing 
generally  for  the  Ten  Tribes,  and  Judah  for  Two  Tribes.  These 
divisions  have  separate  paths  appointed  them  to  walk  in 
through  the  centuries.  “All  the  House  of  Israel  wholly,”  “the 
whole  House  of  Israel,”  “all  the  House  of  Israel,”  have  a 
special  work.  The  Ten  Tribes  are  especially  called  in  the 
Scriptures  the  seed  of  Abraham.  Sometimes  “My  chosen,” 
again,  “Mine  inheritance,”  and  “My  servant.”  God,  in  refer- 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES 


13 


ing  to  them  in  their  scattered  state,  and  of  His  gathering  them 
together,  say  (Isa.  xli.  8)  :  “But  thou,  Israel,  art  My  servant, 
Jacob,  whom  I  have  chosen ;  the  seed  of  Abraham  My  friend — 
thou  whom  I  have  taken  from  the  ends  of  the  earth,  and  called 
thee  from  the  chief  men  thereof,  and  said  unto  thee,  Thou  art 
My  servant ;  I  have  chosen  thee  and  not  cast  thee  away.”  The 
Ten  Tribes  are  sometimes  designated  by  the  word  Jacob.  If 
we  once  get  a  clear  idea  who  the  seed  are,  then  we  can  search 
among  the  people  of  the  earth  to  find  them,  because  in  the  latter 
day  they  were  to  be  so  different  from  other  people,  and  dis¬ 
tinctly  marked,  we  will  have  no  great  difficulty  in  finding  them. 
Of  the  special  marks,  one  was  they  were  to  possess  the  gates  of 
their  enemies.  The  multitudinous  seed  and  other  character¬ 
istics  we  will  pass  by  for  the  present. 

This  seed  were  to  possess  the  gates  of  their  enemies ;  of 
this  we  are  assured  by  the  oath  of  God.  The  word  gate  here, 
you  will  admit,  is  used  in  a  generic  sense.  It  means  a  place  of 
prominence,  a  position  of  strength,  a  strategical  point,  as'  the 
entrance  into  a  city.  Remembering  that  in  olden  times  the 
cities  were  walled  around,  the  gate  was  an  important  point  of 
defence ;  or,  as  the  narrow  entrance  into  a  bay,  like  the  entrance 
into  New  York  Bay  or  port,  the  Narrows  we  call  them.  Here 
our  cities,  New  York  and  Brooklyn,  could  best  and  first  be 
defended.  Again,  a  gate  in  the  general  vernacular  means  any 
stronghold:  a  tower,  an  island,  a  mountain  pass.  Now,  of  this 
seed  it  is  plainly  stated  that  they  shall  possess  the  gates  of  their 
enemies. 

The  text  would  be  very  finely  illustrated  if  we  supposed 
that  Mexico  held  Governor’s  Island,  in  the  middle  of  our  bay,* 
and  defiantly  dictated  to  us  doctrines  of  trade,  politics,  and 
religion.  As  arrogant  and  as  impudent  as  this  would  seem, 
yet  such  is  the  case  with  this  seed  of  Abraham  and  other 
nations.  Believing  that  the  Saxon  race  are  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes, 
it  then  follows  that  the  English  nation  is  the  chief  representa¬ 
tive  of  these  Tribes,  and  that  they  should  be  in  possession  of 
the  gates  of  their  enemies.  Are  they?  We  answer,  yes.  And 
every  year  confirms  and  makes  more  clear  the  answer.  This 
you  say  is  a  theory.  Grant  it.  You  know  that  in  science  a 
theory  is  formed  and  then  applied.  If  you  form  a  theory  about 
the  tides  or  formation  of  the  planets  or  this  world,  your  theory 
with  others  is  applied  to  known  facts  to  see  if  it  will  fit  them, 
to  see  if  it  will  account  for  them,  and  to  see  if  it  is  in  harmony 
with  the  same.  Now  science  accepts  that  theory  which  applies 
best,  that  which  accounts  for  facts  the  most  reasonably,  and 
harmonizes  the  most  naturally.  Such  theory  is  then  the  science 
of  the  day,  and  will  be  so  accepted  and  so  taught  until  it  is  sup¬ 
planted  by  a  better.  Try,  then,  the  theory  I  have  advanced  by 
these  rules. 

♦This  discourse  was  delivered  when  the  Author  was  Pastor  of  a 

Brooklyn  Church. 


14 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


Take  the  Channel  Islands  in  the  English  Channel,  between 
England  and  France,  nearer  to  the  French  shore  than  England; 
the  inhabitants,  being  a  majority  of  them  French,  speaking 
French.  Yet  when  France  was  England’s  greatest  and  most 
dangerous  enemy,  England  held  then,  as  now,  the  gates  of  her 
enemies.  Properly  speaking,  and  adjudged  by  any  human  rule, 
they  belong  to  France — as  naturally  as  the  island  of  Heligoland, 
at  the  mouth  of  the  Elbe,  belongs  to  Germany.  Gibraltar, 
Malta,  Cyprus,  Suez  Canal,  Island  of  Perim  in  the  Straits  of 
Babelmandeb  in  the  Red  Sea,  and  Socotra  in  the  same  sea ;  also 
Aden  in  the  Red  Sea  covering  Arabia ;  Peshawur,  the  very  en¬ 
trance  of  or  from  India  into  Afghanistan.  In  and  around  the 
vast  empire  of  India  you  have  Bombay,  Calcutta,  Madras,  with 
many  similar  strongholds ;  Rangoon,  on  the  Ira  wadi  river, 
commanding  and  ever  menacing  Burmah.  The  vast  empire  of 
China  is  carefully  guarded  and  held  in  check  by  such  gates  as 
Singapore,  Malacca,  Penang,  Hong  Kong  and  Cowloon.  Sara¬ 
wak  in  Borneo,  and  Labuan  off  the  coasts,  are  such  gates. 
Africa  is  being  gradually  gobbled  up;  her  strongholds  and 
vast  areas  of  country  are  falling  into  the  hands  of  England; 
the  coasts  are  fast  coming  under  British  rule.  Quite  recently 
England  has  come  into  possession  of  two  gates — namely,  the 
island  of  Socotra  near  the  Red  Sea  and  the  island  of  Cyprus  in 
the  Mediterranean ;  and  by  arrangement  with  the  Sublime 
Porte  for  a  controlling  influence  in  Egypt.  It  was  also  recently 
stated  that  England  was  negotiating  with  Portugal  for  Delogoa 
Bay  in  South-eastern  Africa ;  price,  three  million  dollars.  But 
this  people  are  not  satisfied  with  all  these  gates.  So  now  they 
have  pretended  to  be  insulted  by  Shere  Ali,  the  Emir  of  Cabul, 
that  they  can  begin  negotiations  of  plunder  and  conquest. 
They  want — and  they  will  get  what  they  want  in  a  very  short 
time,  thank  Heaven ;  not  what  they  deserve ! — they  want  the 
famous  Khyber  Pass.  This  pass  is  a  narrow  road  between 
mountain  rocks  that  rise  over  two  thousand  feet  at  the  lowest 
point.  It  is  some  twenty-eight  miles  long,  while  for  twenty- 
two  miles  the  average  width  is  only  150  feet.  The  Eastern  end 
the  English  already  hold,  called  the  Peshawur  Pass. 


15 


Discourse  III. — Israel  and  Territory. 

Promises  to  Israel — Material  Nature — Location  of  the  Tribes 
in  Christ’s  Day — God’s  Providence — British  and  Ameri¬ 
can  Rule — Life  from  Dead — Teaching  the  Nations  Peace¬ 
ful  Arbitration — England  and  Russia — Afghanistan  Falls 
to  Anglo-Israel — God’s  Political  Geography — Anglo- 
Saxon  Evangelization — Russia  Opposing  It — British  and 
Russian  Outposts, ;  in  Contact — Wail  of  Judah — Earth’s 
Girdle. 


“Enlarge  the  place  of  thy  tent,  and  let  them  stretch  forth  the 
curtains  of  thine  habitations;  spare  not,  lengthen  thy  cords,  and 
strengthen  thy  stakes;  for  thou  shalt  break  forth  on  the  right 
hand  and  on  the  left;  and  thy  seed  shall  inherit  the  Gentiles,  and 
make  the  desolate  cities  to  be  inhabited.” — Isaiah  liv.  2,  3. 


In  the  writings  of  the  prophets  the  feminine  gender  is  often 
used  when  speaking  of  the  House  of  Israel,  and  the  masculine 
when  denoting  the  House  of  Judah.  Quite  frequently  Israel  is 
spoken  of  as  a  divorced  woman,  as  being  cast  off,  and  as  being 
barren.  Judah  remaining  faithful  to  the  throne  of  David  and 
the  temple  service,  and  abiding  in  the  land  much  longer  than 
Israel,  is  presented  as  one  married.  So  you  will  understand 
Jeremiah  iii.  8,  when  he  says:  “And  I  saw,  when  for  all  the 
causes  whereby  backsliding  Israel  committed  adultery  I  had 
put  her  away,  and  given  her  a  bill  of  divorce.  Again,  Isaiah 
1.  1 :  “Thus  saith  the  Lord,  Where  is  the  bill  of  your  mother’s 
divorcement  whom  I  have  put  away  ?  ’  Yet,  though  Israel  was 
divorced,  forsaken,  cast  off,  and  desolate,  she  was  to  have  more 
children  than  married  Judah.  So  the  verse  preceding  the 
text  says:  “Sing,  O  barren,  thou  that  didst  not  bear;  break 
forth  into  singing,  and  cry  aloud  thou  that  didst  not  travail 
with  child;  for  more  are  the  children  of  the  desolate  than  the 
children  of  the  married  wife,  saith  the  Lord.”  Then  come  the 
words  of  the  text,  bidding  her  enlarge  the  place  of  her  tent,  or 
dwelling-place,  to  stretch  forth  her  curtains,  so  as  to  cover  over 
the  new-gotten  habitations.  To  spare  not — that  is,  to  be  not 
tardy  or  slow — in  lengthening  out  her  cords  that  is,  her 
influence— and  strengthen  her  stakes— that  is,  her  authority ; 
but  to  break  forth  on  every  hand  where  there  is  an  opening,  and 
inherit  the  seed  of  the  Gentiles,  and  make  the  languishing  and 
poverty-stricken  cities  of  the  nations  to  be  inhabited ,  m  this 

conquest  to  go  on  and  fear  not.  .  ,  , 

These  exhortations  are  given,  and  promises  are  made  *° 
Israel  after  she  had  left  Palestine.  No  one  can  say  truthfully 
that  they  have  yet  been  fulfilled  in  any  degree  or  sense,  unless 
they  find  such  fulfilment  in  the  conquests  of  the  Saxon  race. 
These  predictions  cannot  apply  to  the  Jews,  for  they  are  few, 


16 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


nationless,  and  without  a  government.  Touching  the  past 
history  of  both  Judah  and  Israel  in  Palestine,  we  shall  find  it 
to  be  barren  of  victories,  territory,  acquisition,  and  number,  in 
comparison  to  other  nations.  They  have  never  occupied  the 
land  given  to  Abraham  in  fulness.  In  Solomon’s  time  they 
bare  rule  only  over  a  part  of  it.  The  Gentiles  and  heathen 
have  occupied  it  more  and  longer  than  the  sons  of  Abraham. 
But  what  failed  to  be  accomplished  in  the  past,  is  held  grandly 
in  reserve  for  this  day,  the  next  few  years.  God  will  remem¬ 
ber  His  promise  to  Abraham,  Isaac,  Jacob,  and  David.  He  will 
remember  it,  and  fulfil  it. 

We  have  been  blind  and  guilty  in  the  past,  unconscious  of 
our  origin,  and  as  a  natural  consequence,  ignorant  of  our  place 
and  special  work.  In  interpreting  the  Word  of  God  we  have 
been  lavish  in  spiritualising,  and  greedy  in  materialising,  over¬ 
looking  the  fact  that  nine-tenths  of  the  Old  Testament  is  a 
material  history  about  one  people,  and  that  through  them 
God’s  special  providence  was  to  flow  to  all  other  nations ;  and 
the  New  Testament  plants  the  life  and  prosperity  of  the  Gen¬ 
tile  world  upon  the  course  and  progress  of  Israel.  God  said 
to  Abraham,  “In  these  shall  all  the  families  of  the  earth  be 
blessed” ;  and  more,  “and  in  thy  seed  shall  all  the  nations  of 
the  earth  be  blessed.”  Israel,  being  scattered  and  cast  off, 
became  a  blessing  to  the  world.  They  gave  to  the  surrounding 
nations  the  only  true  idea  of  God,  for  in  their  lowest  condition 
and  idolatry  they  preserved  the  name  and  knowledge  of  Je¬ 
hovah,  and  Christ  sent  His  disciples  after  them  through  one 
of  their  own  tribe — namely,  Benjamin — telling  them  not  to  go 
into  the  way  of  the  Gentiles,  nor  into  the  cities  of  the  Samari¬ 
tans,  “but  go  rather  to  the  lost  sheep  of  the  house  of  Israel.” 
To  these  sheep  Christ  declares  He  was  sent.  Where  were 
these  sheep?  They  were  scattered  about  in  Central  Asia— in 
Scriptural  language  in  Cappadocia,  Galatia,  Pamphylia,  Lydia, 
Bithynia,  and  round  about  Illyricum.  From  these  very  regions 
came  the  Saxons;  from  here  they  spread  abroad  North  and 
West,  being  the  most  Christian  of  any  people  on  the  face  of 
the  earth  then,  as  well  as  now.  Their  reception  of  the  Gospel 
gave  them  power  over  the  surrounding  nations,  to  whom  they 
were,  as  it  had  been  foretold,  witnesses  for  Jesus  and  provi¬ 
dence  in  a  very  special  manner.  What,  then,  we  say  with  Paul, 
will  be  the  blessing  of  Israel — recognised  and  fully  restored  to 
God’s  favour?  If  so  much  good  was  carried  and  bestowed  upon 
the  Gentile  nations  because  Israel  was  scattered,  how  much, 
and  what  are  the  blessings  in  store  for  those  nations  when  Israel 
and  Judah  be  restored?  Paul  compares  it  to  a  resurrection — 
like  as  when  the  barrenness  and  desolation  of  a  winter  is  sup¬ 
planted  by  the  fruits  and  beauties  of  summer.  “If  the  casting 
away  of  them  be  the  reconciling  of  the  world,  what  shall  the  re¬ 
ceiving  of  them  be,  but  life  from  the  dead?”  (Rom.  xi.  15). 

It  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  this  world  is  subject  to  the 
providence  of  God.  Such  a  supposition  is  grandly  sustained 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY 


17 


by  the  laws  and  operations  of  nature  without,  and  the  experi¬ 
ence  and  intuitions  of  the  mind  within ;  and  I  believe  this  provi¬ 
dence  to  be  all-comprehensive,  bounding,  and  recognising  all 
things  past,  present,  and  future,  both  small  and  great ;  claim¬ 
ing  the  ages  for  its  measure,  the  universe  for  the  field  of  its 
operations,  and  the  Infinite  as  the  source  of  power.  “The 
Lord  Jehovah  reigns,  let  the  earth  rejoice.”  Let  me  persuade 
you  to  thoroughly  believe  in  the  precision,  the  intimacy,  and 
the  completeness  of  this  providence.  This  doctrine  we  need 
to  fully  learn  and  accept.  “In  the  beginning  God  created  the 
heavens  and  the  earth,”  and  it  is  He  “who  hath  measured 
the  waters  in  the  hollow  of  His  hand,  and  meted  out  heaven 
with  a  span,  and  comprehended  the  dust  of  the  earth  in  a 
measure,  and  weighed  the  mountains  in  scales,  and  the  hills  in 
a  balance.”  Aye,  and  more,  jet  closer  still  does  this  provi¬ 
dence  approach  us  in  our  affairs.  “By  Him  kings  reign  and 
princes  decree  judgment.  He  bringeth  the  princes  to  nothing; 
He  maketh  the  judges  of  the  earth  as  vanity.”  Even  closer  yet, 
for  without  His  permission  a  sparrow  cannot  fall  to  the  ground ; 
and  so  intimate  is  He  with  us,  that  He  knoweth  the  number 
of  the  hairs  of  the  head.  Now  all  this  kind  of  Bible  instruc¬ 
tion  is  intended  to  teach  the  nearness  of  God  to  us,  and  His 
interest  and  intimacy  with  nations  and  nature.  Let  us  not  think 
for  a  moment  that  nations  can  rush  to  war  and  be  outside  of 
this  circle  of  providence.  Let  us  study  to  know  God  s  mind, 
His  plans  and  purposes  with  the  nations ;  for  rest  satisfied  that 
His  plan  will  finally  be  accepted  by  men  and  nations,  and  His 
purposes  will  prevail.  Kings  may  plan,  diplomatists  may  dip¬ 
lomatise,  scientists  may  analyse,  theologians  may  teach  and 
preach  their  isms,  and  politicians  may  make  platforms  and  con¬ 
struct  rings,  yet  none,  nor  all  combined,  can  stay  the  hand 
of  God.  “He  doeth  according  to  His  will  in  the  armies  of 
heaven  and  among  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  He  can 
initiate,  permit,  modify,  and  destroy.  Once  we  truly  recognise 
the  sovereignty  of  God  over  us,  conceit  will  lie  dead  at  the  feet 

of  humility.  .  ,  ,  ,  ,  . 

The  Church  at  large  has  but  a  slender  hold  upon  this  great 
doctrine.  They  look  upon  the  great  movement  of  wars  and 
strife  rising  and  falling  of  nations,  as  looks  the  country  stran¬ 
ger  upon  a  railway  engine  the  first  time,  the  whirling  wheels, 
the  steam  and  smoke  and  burnished  boiler  rivet  his  attention  so 
completely,  that  he  sees  not  the  driver  in  his  car.  So  men 
are  dazed  with  the  show  and  pomp  of  courts  and  councils,  with 
the  harangues  of  legislators  and  march  of  regiments  that  they 
discern  not  the  master  hand  behind  that  directs  all.  Verily 
Thou  art  a  God  that  hidest  Thyself.”  No,  no,  friends ; 
English  bravery  nor  American  ingenuity  will  not  account 
for*3 all  that  England  has  done  on  the  line  of  victories, 
and  the  marvellous  and  rapid  growth  of  these  United  States. 
As  God  said  long  ago  through  Moses,  so  He  could  say  to¬ 
day _ for  heavenly  counsel  was  given  to  the  children  of  Israel 


18 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


on  entering  the  Promised  Land,  with  the  design  of  suppress¬ 
ing  their  pride  and  enabling  them  to  form  a  correct  idea  of 
their  success  in  driving  out  the  strong  and  great  nations  of 
Canaanites  and  Philistines — “Speak  not  thou  in  thine  heart, 
after  that  the  Lord  thy  God  hath  cast  them  out  from  before 
thee,  saying:  For  my  righteousness  the  Lord  hath  brought  me 
in  to  possess  this  land ;  but  for  the  wickedness  of  these  nations 
the  Lord  doth  drive  them  out  from  before  thee.  Not  for  thy 
righteousness,  or  the  uprightness  of  thine  heart,  dost  thou  go 
to  possess  the  land,  but  for  the  wickedness  of  those  nations  the 
Lord  thy  God  doth  drive  them  out  from  before  thee,  that  He 
may  perform  the  word  which  the  Lord  sware  unto  thy  fathers, 
Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob.  Understand,  therefore,  that  the 
Lord  thy  God  giveth  thee  not  this  good  land  to  possess  it  for 
thy  righteousness,  for  thou  art  a  stiffnecked  people”  (Deut. 
ix.  4). 

By  the  same  rule  and  for  the  very  same  reason  that  Israel 
conquered  Palestine,  does  England  go  on  from  conquest  to 
conquest.  And  because  God  remembered  to  perform  His 
promises  made  to  the  patriarchs  upon  their  seed,  America  was 
opened  for  the  Puritans,  who  are  without  doubt  the  descend¬ 
ants  and  representatives  of  Manasseh,  of  whom  God  said  he 
should  be  a  people,  a  great  people. 

The  rule  of  England  and  America  over  other  people  is  as 
life  from  the  dead — that  is,  whatever  country  England  con¬ 
quers  and  rules,  it  is  better  for  the  people,  and  the  country,  and 
the  world.  They  give  to  the  people  a  liberty  that  they  would 
not  have  given  to  themselves ;  they  develop  the  resources  of 
the  country  as  never  before  and  by  trade  and  commerce  bless 
the  people  and  cause  them  to  be  a  blessing  unto  others.  And 
better  still,  they  make  known  to  the  conquered  ones,  in  due 
time,  the  riches  of  faith  in  Christ.  So  we  have  no  hestitation 
in  saying  a  thing  patent  to  every  unprejudiced  observer,  that 
the  aborgines  of  the  conquered  colonies  of  Great  Britain  are 
treated  better  by  their  conquerors  than  they  ever  treated  them¬ 
selves.  The  Africans,  in  the  conquered  colonies  of  Africa,  are 
better  off  under  British  rule  than  those  colonies  or  portions 
unconquered  are.  The  hosts  of  India  enjoy  more,  fare  better 
in  every  grace  and  virtue  in  all  that  goes  to  adorn  and  develop 
mankind,  under  the  British  government  and  protection  than 
they  ever  did  or  would  under  self-government.  So  the  French, 
Germans,  Italians,  Russians,  Spaniards,  and  the  numerous 
progeny  of  emigrants  to  this  country,  fare  better  in  every  way 
with  Manasseh  than  they  did  in  their  own  lands.  Of  course, 
both  in  England’s  rule  and  America’s  there  are  many  defects; 
but  taking  all  in  all,  the  good  will  out-weigh  the  bad  ;  and  more 
so  as  the  years  roll  on. 

True,  an  arbitrary  purpose  and  an  individualism  is  seen  on 
the  surface,  yet  under  it  all  there  is  the  hand  of  God. .  The 
farmer  is  free  as  to  what  he  sows,  but  the  Divine,  without 
interfering  with  his  freedom,  regulates  the  harvest  to  plenty  or 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY 


19 


famine.  The  Saxon  people,  England  and  America,  stand  in  a 
new  light  to  the  world  by  the  teachings  of  the  Bible.  Being 
Israel  or  the  Lost  Ten  Tribes,  they  become  at  once  the  chosen 
agents  of  God  for  the  glorious  purpose  of  evangelising  the 
whole  world,  and  finally,  by  reducing  the  whole  earth  to  the 
plane  of  universal  liberty  and  peace. 

It  was  necessary  that  these  two  nations  should  be  first 
taught  the  art  of  mediation,  for  the  ends  of  peace  ;  that  they 
should  learn  and  show  to  the  world  that  national  disputes  and 
grievances  can  be  settled  without  an  appeal  to  the  sword.  Hence 
we  have,  and  what  is  much  better,  the  world  has,  Geneva  and 
Alabama  and  the  fish  bounty  treaty  of  Canada  and  the  United 
States.  Not  all  the  press  did  on  either  side,  not  all  the  carping 
and  blustering  of  individuals,  could  prevent  the  happy  consum¬ 
mation  of  both  these  treaties.  To  God  be  praise,  for  they  are 
prophetic  harbingers  of  a  better  day  coming. 

No  hand  nor  power,  nor  combination  of  powers,  can  stop  the 
onward  march  of  Israel  to  her  God-ordained  goal.  Her  future 
is  to  spread  on  the  right  hand  and  on  the  left.  Island  after 
island,  colony  after  colony,  will  fall  into  her  hand  for  mutua 
benefit.  Russia  may  contest  this  march,  and  will,  for  she  is  as 
much  the  appointed  agent  of  contest  from  Heaven  as  England 
is  to  advance.  In  a  few  years  she  will  try  to  take  the  place  of 
England  among  the  nations,  as  she  has  just  done  in  Afghanis¬ 
tan  Russia  promised,  no  doubt,  Shere  Ali,  that  they  would 
and  could  protect  him  against  England,  but  the  bargain  was 
outside  of  the  aims  of  Providence,  hence  it  could  not  be  sus¬ 
tained.  It  is  ordained  of  Heaven  that  Afghanistan  fall  into  the 
hands  of  England,  if  England  be  Israel.  . 

Against  this  fate-like  division  of  the  world  Russia  is  going 
to  contend  and  fight  whenever  she  gets  a  chance.  It  would  pay 
Russia  and  many  other  countries  to  read  that  When  the 
Most  High  divided  to  the  nations  their  inheritance,  when  He 
separated  the  sons  of  Adam,  He  set  the  bounds  of  the  people 
according  to  the  number  of  the  children  of  Israel  Heut. 
xxxii.  8).  These  bounds  God  will  maintain  wherever  they 
run;  whatever  country  they  cut  in  two,  no  matter,  the  earth 
must  finally  conform  to  this  Divine  geography.  This  Purpose 
H  strongly  set  forth  by  Isaiah  xliv.  7 :  “And  who  as  I,  shall 
call,  and  shall  declare  it,  and  set  it  in  order  for  Me,  since 
appointed  the  ancient  people  ?  and  the  things  that  are  coming 
and  shall  come.”  This  same  sturdy  fact  is  taught  by  Paul 
when  speaking  to  the  Athenians,  telling  them  that  God  hath 
made  of  one  blood  all  nations  of  men  to  dwell  on  the  face  of 
the  earth,  and  hath  determined  the  times  before  appointed,  and 
tie  bounds  of  their  habitations .”  National  destinies  are  not 
so  much  things  of  chance,  or  prizes  for  the  sword,  as  many 
think  God  promised  to  David,  when  both  Israel  and  Judah 
were  prosperously  settled  in  Palestine  under  David  s  reign 
that  He  would  appoint  a  place  for  His  people  Israel,  and  plant 
them  there,  and  they  should  not  be  moved,  neither  should  the 


20 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


wicked  afflict  them  as  aforetime  (2  Sam.  vii.  10).  This  prom¬ 
ise  God  has  kept.  He  has  given  them  the  British  Isles,  where 
none  can  afflict  them,  as  they  were  wont  to  do  when  Israel  was 
scattered  in  Asia  and  Europe.  God  has  found  Manasseh  a 
home  in  this  land  of  blessings  and  rich  acres. 

England,  by  a  necessity,  was  forced  to  find  new  countries  to 
provide  for  her  multiplying  population.  Then  she  is  forced  to 
enter  other  nations  as  a  missionary.  She,  with  Manasseh,  is 
chiefly  responsible  for  the  evangelization  of  the  world,  and  of 
course  they  are  at  work  all  over  the  world,  for  England  and  the 
United  States  send  out  more  missionaries  than  all  the  world 
beside.  Russia  needs  no  land  for  colonization,  for  now  her 
inhabitants  number  only  thirty-four  to  the  square  mile,  while 
England  numbers  389.  If  we  take  in  all  the  territory  under 
Russia  and  England,  even  then  England  has  more  to  the 
square  mile  than  Russia.  Russia  comprises  about  8,000,000 
square  miles,  and  England,  with  her  late  additions,  leaving  out 
the  United  States,  numbers  about  9,000,000.  Joining  Ephraim 
and  Manasseh  together,  they  own  one-fourth  of  the  whole 
world — namely,  about  13,000,000  square  miles;  the  whole  earth 
numbers  51,340,800  square  miles.  Besides,  Russia  is  not  a 
missionary  country.  She  neither  sends  any  nor  accepts  any, 
being  at  present  the  only  nation  closed  to  missionary  opera¬ 
tion  and  toleration.  The  past  few  years  Russia  has  gained 
rapidly  in  territorial  power.  With  the  conquest  of  Bokhara 
and  portions  of  Turkestan,  or  Independent  Tartary,  she  has 
added  some  800,000  square  miles. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  last  century  the  Russian  advance 
forts  were  2,500  miles  distant  from  those  of  England.  At  the 
close  of  the  century  the  distance  was  2,000.  Then  in  1810  it 
was  reduced  to  1,000.  And  since  1855  it  has  been  reduced  to 
400.  And  now,  of  course,  they  want  it  reduced  to  nothing  by 
getting  control  of  Afghanistan. 

How  wonderfully  clear  are  the  fulfilling  events  of  the  proph¬ 
ecy.  This  king  of  the  North  is  to  become  a  strong  king, 
who,  when  Israel  and  Judah  are  settled  in  Palestine,  will  have 
spirit  and  power  to  attack  them.  So  he  is  ripening,  growing, 
and  gathering  power  ready.  Russia  now  comprises  nine  crowns, 
eight  of  which  are  crowns  of  conquest.  Russia’s  one  grand  de¬ 
sire  is  to  possess  Palestine,  especially  Jerusalem.  The  Crimean 
war  was  waged  for  rights  and  extended  privileges  in  the  holy 
city.  To-day  Russian  pilgrims  swarm  thither  by  the  thousands 
every  year.  A  few  years  ago  she  built  outside  of  the  Jaffa 
gate  what  she  called  an  hospice,  which  was  designed  to  be 
nothing  more  nor  less  than  a  fort.  It  is  in  a  position  command¬ 
ing  the  whole  city,  and  is  a  place  of  great  strength.  Often  she 
has  tried  to  possess  the  city  and  land.  By-and-bye  she  will  be 
permitted  by  Providence  to  pour  her  troops  into  this  “land  of 
unwalled  villages,”  and  when  having  nearly  achieved  the  am¬ 
bitious  plan  of  ages,  and  nearly  realised  her  one  great  na¬ 
tional  idea,  she  will  perish,  to  rise  no  more,  “on  the  mountains 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY 


21 


of  Israel.”  Her  history  is  set  forth  by  Ezekiel  xxxvm.  and 

xxxix.  chapters.  ,  .  , .  . ,  r- 

Palestine  and  Jerusalem  have  borne  undeniable  evidence  tor 

prophecy  and  Providence.  The  whole  land  and  the  Book  have 
been  wonderfully  agreed  during  the  past  nineteen  centuries 
How  significant  and  telling  the  wailings  and  lamentations  ot 
the  devout  Jews  who  crowd  under  the  walls  of  the  mosque  of 
Omar,  the  site  of  the  ancient  tel^JPle*  Here,  each  returning 
Sabbath,  groups  of  Jews  may  be  heard  dolefully  crying  A 
bene,  Ali  bene;  bene  bethka ;  bekarob,  bimheira,  bimheira, 
beyamenu,  bekarob,”  which,  being  interpreted  means  Lord 
build,  Lord  build;  build  Thy  house  speedily,  m  haste,  m  haste, 
even  in  our  day  build  Thy  house  speedily.  Yes  mourning 
brethren  of  Judah,  the  time  is  coming  when  the  house  shall 
be  built  and  the  voice  of  wailing  no  more  heard  in  the  streets. 

Can  anv  student  or  inquirer  after  the  truth  fail  to  see  that 
in  our  day  a  prophecy  is  being  fulfilled?  Can  anyone  shut 
their  eyes  to  the  wonderful  fact  that  Israel  is  breaking  forth  on 
the  leTand  on  the  right?  God  has  long  ago  said  that  Israe 
were  the  people  of  His  inheritance,  and  that  Jacob  was  the  ot 
of  His  inheritance,  or  His  girdle,  or  cord,  as  the  word  lot 
means.  Then,  if  you  turn  your  attention  to  Great  Britain  a 
her  colonies  including  Manasseh,  you  will  see  this  g 
measuring  Hne  around®  the  earth.  Let  me  aid  you  by  pointing 

the  same 'out  for  you.  Look  at  the  East* jmrS 'fe -‘pass 
inclosing  the  Gentile  nations.  Begin  with  Great  Britain,  pass 
on  to  fhe  Channel  Islands,  Gibraltar,  Malta,  Cyprus  West 
Coast  African  Colonies,  St.  Helena  Cape  Colonies  Maantms, 
Sevchelles  Perim,  Aden,  Ceylon,  India,  Burmah,  Straus  S 
tlements  Labuan,  Australian  Colonies,  Hong  Kong,  and 

Dominion  of  Canada^  In 'SanTXw 

British  ^Honduras, 

“^"ds  a^d  Newfoundland  ^ 
see  that  Israel  is  possessing  the  isles  of  th e  s< ia  c, Hast 

the  earth  ”  “waste  and  desolate  places  .  these  tin  g 
hid  in  a  corner ;  they  proclaim  the  intentions  of  god,  mi  over¬ 
ruling  Providence;  and  who  and  where  the  Lost  1  nbes  are. 
A  miracle  and  prophecy  are  fulfilling  before  our  ey  . 


22 


Discourse  IV. — Israel  and  Population. 

Prophetic  Latter  Days — Our  Bearings  in  the  Ages — Unwise 
Impatience — Israel  to  be  always  a  Nation — Her  Empire — 
Historic  Career  of  and  Future  of  England,  America  and 
Judah — Relative  Increase  of  Population — The  Infidel 
Saxon — Jewish,  British,  and  American  Interests  One — 
A  Full  End  of  all  Nations  but  Israel — Famine  Hence¬ 
forth  Only  for  the  Heathen — Arbitration  to  be  Enforced 
by  Israel— American  Absorption — Startling  Figures  of 
Future  Population — The  Balance  of  Power . 

“Yet  the  number  of  the  children  of  Israel  shall  be  as  the  sand  of 
the  sea,  which  cannot  be  measured  nor  numbered;  and  it  shall 
come  to  pass  that  in  the  place  where  it  was  said  unto  them,  Ye  are 
not  My  people,  there  it  shall  be  said  unto  them,  Ye  are  the  sons  of 
the  living  God.” — Hosea  i.  10. 

A  period  of  time  is  frequently  referred  to  in  the  Scriptures  as 
being  the  “latter  days.”  It  is,  therefore,  very  important  for 
the  prophetic  student,  and  the  Church  of  Christ  at  large,  that 
the  time  of  days  spoken  of  should  be  known.  For  connected 
with  these  days  are  a  number  of  prophecies  waiting  fulfil¬ 
ment,  and  they  are  of  such  a  nature  that  their  fulfilment  may 
easily  be  discerned.  In  breadth  and  scope  they  cover  much 
territory  and  include  many  people.  They  cannot  be  hid  in  a 
corner,  for  the  parts  are  so  numerous  and  the  interests  so 
great.  The  fulfilment  of  these  prophecies  will  make  a  radical 
and  fundamental  change  in  Church  and  State. 

I  take  it  for  granted  we  are  now  entering  into  the  time  of 
the  latter  days — a  time  that  precedes  by  a  natural  consequence 
the  millennium.  It  is,  therefore,  unwise  on  the  part  of  any 
person  to  claim  that  Christ  may  come  any  day,  and  that  His 
millennial  reign  may  be  begun  at  any  moment.  It  is  but  fair 
that  we  should  carefully  consider  our  bearings  in  the  circle  of 
Providence  and  our  position  in  the  ages.  The  story  and  work 
of  redemption  are  grand,  full  of  interest  and  thrilling  incidents  ; 
still  we  must  take  things  in  their  order.  Some  stories  we  read 
are  very  fascinating.  The  plot  culminates,  the  characters 
and  incidents  converge  toward  and  centre  in  the  hero.  At 
such  a  point  we  are  often  carried  away  with  our  sympathy 
for  the  hero ;  we  become  anxious  for  him,  and  desirous  to 
know  the  issues,  and  so  are  tempted  to  skip  a  few  pages  and 
get  at  the  end  unwisely  and  unlawfully.  Thus  I  think  many 
are  carried  away  by  a  loving  desire  for  the  millennium ;  they 
become  anxious  for  the  return  of  the  Hero  of  redemption; 
they  skip  a  few  pages  of  Providence,  and  come  to  the  end  too 
soon. 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION 


23 


These  days  are  preparative,  and  in  such  a  preparative  stage 
we  are  warranted  to  look  for  the  fulfilment  of  certain  prophe¬ 
cies  ;  for  prophecies,  indeed,  of  such  a  nature  and  character 
that  no  Bible  student  need  be  mistaken  as  to  the  time,  place, 
and  conditions  of  fulfilment.  We  have  called  your  attention 
to  one  of  these  prophecies,  and  pointed  out  to  you  how  the 
same  was  literally  fulfilling  before  the  eyes  of  all.  God,  in 
olden  times,  made  promises  to  Abraham,  the  patriarchs,  and 
their  seed.  These  promises  were  nothing  more  nor  less  than 
prophecies.  He  attested  the  same  by  His  own  oath.  He  called 
to  witness  the  sun,  moon,  stars,  sea,  night,  day,  the  seasons, 
seedtime  and  harvest.  These  He  called  His  ordinances.  These 
ordinances  may  depart  from  before  Him,  but  the  seed  of 
Israel  should  not  cease  to  be  a  nation.  They  were  not  only  to  be 
a  nation,  but  a  company  of  nations.  To  this  end,  in  the  latter 
days,  they  were  to  come  in  possession  of  the  isles  of  the  sea, 
the  coasts  of  the  earth,  waste  and  desolate  places ;  to  inherit 
the  seed  of  the  Gentiles,  and  cause  their  desolate  cities  to  be 
filled.  They  were  to  possess  and  rule  over  the  heathen.  In 
the  latter  days  they  were  to  possess  Edom  and  Esau,  and  so 
come  in  possession  of  their  own  land,  Palestine.  Now  I  call 
you  to  witness,  and  ask  you  if  these  things  are  so?  Before 
your  eyes,  before  mine,  before  the  eyes  of  all  the  world,  God 
is  fulfilling  His  promises  made  to  the  fathers. 

The  very  exceptions  to  the  sweeping  and  comprehensive 
possessions  of  the  seed  of  Jacob  are  pyramidal  witnesses  to  the 
same.  The  House  of  Judah  was  to  become  homeless,  without  a 
nation  and  without  a  government,  after  they  left  Palestine ; 
but  to  be  a  people  known  by  the  race  feature  and  by  their  un¬ 
wavering  adherence,  attachment,  and  fidelity  to  the  Mosaic 
worship.  This  exception  all  can  see,  and  none  can  truthfully 
deny.  They  have  had  money  and  men  enough  to  buy  and  rule 
a  nation,  but  as  yet  they  have  none.  Their  talent,  their  ability, 
and  their  money,  have  been  the  chief  factor  in  the  rule,  pros¬ 
perity,  and  greatness  of  many  nations  in  the  past  as  well  as  now. 
And  the  second  conception  is  not  less  grand  and  conclusive. 
Let  any  one  inquire  what  was  to  be  the  portion  of  the  1  ribe  of 
Manasseh,  and  they  will  find  that  Manasseh  was  to  be  a  distinct 
people,  a  great  people;  for  so  said  the  dying  patriarch  Jacob. 
Now  such  a  people,  a  great  people,  we  hold  Manasseh  to  be  at 
this  day  in  the  people  of  the  United  States.  Some  sixty 
colonies  England  has  overrun,  established,  or  conquered.  Is  it 
not  remarkable  that  she  has  never  lost  one  of  the  many  save  the 
United  States?  Will  any  one  give  an  earthly  reason  for  this 
marvellous  exception  ?  I  presume  no  one  can.  1  here  is,  how¬ 
ever,  a  Divine  reason.  Moses,  when  giving  his  prophetic  bene¬ 
diction  to  the  Tribes  of  Israel,  gives  us  an  insight  into  this 
question.  Speaking  of  Joseph  and  the  wonderful  blessing  in 
store  for  his  sons  Ephraim  and  Manasseh,  he  says :  “His  glory 
is  like  the  firstling  of  his  bullock,  and  his  horns  are  like  the 
horns  of  unicorns ;  and  with  them  he  shall  push  the  people  to- 


24 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


gether  to  the  ends  of  the  earth;  and  they  are  the  ten  thousands 
of  Ephraim ,  and  they  are  the  thousands  of  Manasseli ”  (Deut. 
xxxiii.  17).  And  further  light  is  thrown  on  this  subject  when 
we  notice  what  Isaiah  says  in  the  forty-ninth  chapter.  The 
children  of  Israel,  when  settled  in  some  Isles,  would  lose  a 
portion  of  themselves,  and  still  the  “children  which  thou  shalt 
have  after  thou  hast  lost  the  other,  shall  say  again  in  thine 
ears,  The  place  is  too  strait  for  me,  give  place  to  me  that  I 
may  dwell.”  The  simple  and  natural  interpretation  of  such  a 
passage  is,  that  the  Isles  referred  to  were  the  British  Isles. 
The  children  lost  refer  to  Manasseh,  the  Pilgrims,  and  Puri¬ 
tans  who  came  from  England.  And  the  cry  for  more  room 
after  they  have  left  shall  lead  England  to  look  for  lands  in 
which  to  colonise  her  surplus  population,  all  of  which  she  has 
done  and  is  doing. 

Surely  in  these  things  there  is  something  more  than  chance. 
Yes,  there  is  a  Divine  purpose  fufilled.  Seeing,  then,  that  God 
will  put  the  land  into  Israel’s  hand,  there  will  run  another  bless¬ 
ing  parallel  with  this —  namely,  a  peculiar  increase  of  the  seed, 
or  children  of  Israel,  so  that  they  may  occupy  and  control  these 
lands.  These  two  prophecies  are  to  be  fulfilling  on  a  parallel 
line  at  the  same  time.  Are  they  so  fulfilling?  We  answer, 
Yes ;  and  the  answer  all  the  world  may  verify,  for  the  facts  are 
of  such  a  nature  that  if  they  are  not  so  fulfilling  it  can  be  very 
easily  disproved. 

The  prophet  tells  us  in  the  text  that  the  children  of  Israel  are 
to  be  numerous — to  be  numerous  in  an  extraordinary  degree — 
so  much  so  that  it  will  appear  partly  miraculous  when  such  in¬ 
crease  is  compared  to  other  people  or  judged  by  the  common 
methods  of  reasoning.  Plosea  had  three  children ;  the  first  a 
son.  He  called  him  Jezreel.  This  son  was  set  for  a  witness 
that  God  would  cause  to  cease  the  House  of  Israel  in  Palestine 
— that  Israel  should  cease  to  be  a  nation  for  a  time.  This  idea 
Isaiah  points  out  under  the  type  of  an  abandoned  wife.  God 
styles  Himself  the  Husband  of  Israel,  and  that  He  had  given 
the  wife  a  bill  of  divorcement.  Thus  the  two  prophets  agree, 
and  history  ratifies  both. 

Hosea’s  second  child  he  calls  Lo-ruhamah.  She  was  set  for 
a  witness  that  God  would  take  away  His  mercy  from  the  House 
of  Israel  for  a  time,  and  that  God  would  utterly  take  them  away 
out  of  the  land.  So  He  did ;  for  a  few  years  after  this  we  find 
the  children  of  Israel  were  carried  captive  into  Assyria  by 
Shalmaneser,  and  the  Assyrians  were  brought  and  put  in  their 
place.  Amd  from  these  Assyrians,  who  were  planted  in  the 
cities  and  country  left  by  the  children  of  Israel,  we  get  the  Sa¬ 
maritans,  who  were,  as  you  see,  not  Jews  nor  Israelites  by  gen¬ 
eration — they  were  manufactured  Jews  only.  “And  the  Lord 
removed  Israel  out  of  His  sight,  as  He  had  said  by  all  His  ser¬ 
vants  the  prophets.  So  was  Israel  carried  away  out  of  their 
own  land  to  Assyria  unto  this  day”  (2  Kings  xvii.  23).  During 
this  captivity,  which  is  even  in  force  till  now,  barren  Israel,  the 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION 


25 


divorced  one,  was  to  have  more  children  than  the  married  one 
— namely,  Judah. 

We  find  that  the  third  child  born  to  Hosea  is  called  Lo-ammi, 
meaning,  “Ye  are  not  My  people.”  This  child  prefigured  the 
casting  out  of  the  Jews;  that  they  would  refuse  to  accept  God 
in  Christ,  and  He  therefore  would  reject  them.  Thus  the  Jews 
became  wanderers  from  their  own  land.  And  the  land  rests  in 
desolation,  enjoying  her  Sabbath  of  rest,  while  her  sons  and 
daughters  are  being  chastised  and  trained  for  their  return. 

The  time  will  come  when  God  will  call  Israel  to  Him,  and 
have  mercy  upon  her,  when  the  divorced  one  shall  be  restored 
to  her  husband.  “And  it  shall  be  at  that  day,  saith  the  Lord, 
that  thou  shalt  call  Me  Ishi,  and  shall  call  Me  no  more  Baali” 
(Hos.  ii.  16).  Now  Ishi  means  husband,  and  Baali  stands  for 
Lord.  Saxons  have  been  looked  upon  as  being  infidels  by  the 
rest  of  the  world.  The  Mohammedans  and  Buddhists  never 
reckoned  the  Saxons  as  being  the  sons  of  God;  and  Catholic 
Europe  and  Greek  Russia  have  looked  upon  England  as  infidel 
and  heretical.  And  the  Saxons  themselves  never  went  so  far  in 
their  knowledge  as  to  know  who  they  were,  their  origin  and 
work.  But  the  prophet  says:  “It  shall  come  to  pass  that  in 
the  place  where  it  was  said  unto  them,  Ye  are  not  My  people, 
there  it  shall  be  said  unto  them,  Ye  are  the  sons  of  the  living 
God.”  And  the  time  will  come  when  Lo-ruhamah  shall  become 
Ru-hamah,  which  means  to  have  obtained  mercy.  And  Lo- 
ammi  shall  become  Ammi,  which  means  that  this  is  My  people. 
And  Jezreel,  which  was  a  sign  of  dispersion,  shall  be  the  sign 
of  gathering.  “Then  shall  the  children  of  Judah  and  the 
children  of  Israel  be  gathered  together,  and  appoint  themselves 
one  head,  and  they  shall  come  up  out  of  the  land;  for  great 
shall  be  tho  day  of  Jezreel Then  the  Jews  (Ammi)  will  call 
the  Saxons  their  sister,  long  lost,  but  found  at  last.  The  Saxons 
(Ru-hamah)  will  call  the  Jews  their  brother,  those  whom  in 
the  past  they  have  hated  and  persecuted ;  and  thought  them¬ 
selves  far  removed  from  Jewish  blood.  Now  they  both  will  ac¬ 
knowledge  a  common  generation,  and  Abraham  their  father. 
And  one  with  his  eyes  half  open  can  see  this  part  of  the  pro¬ 
phecy  fulfilling.  The  Jews,  England,  and  United  States,,  from 
this  and  henceforth,  are  one  in  interest,  policy,  and  destiny. 

These  being  the  latter  days,  let  us  look  for  the  signs  of  the 
multiplying  of  the  seed  so  that  they  be  as  the  sea  sands  God 
promised  to  Abraham,  saying:  “That  in  blessing  I  will  bless 
thee,  and  in  multiplying  I  will  multiply  thy  seed  as  the  stars  of 
heaven  and  as  the  sand  which  is  upon  the  seashore ;  and  thy 
seed  shall  possess  the  gate  of  his  enemies”  (Gen.  xxii.  17). 
Old  Jacob  foretold  that  Joseph  would  be  a  fruitful  bough, 
whose  branches  would  run  over  the  wall — that  is,,  colonise. 
This  increase  is  to  be  seen  in  two  ways.  Let  me  direct  your 
attention  to  one  of  these  ways,  in  a  special  manner,  because  it  is 
so  singular  and  unique,  so  distinct  and  discernible.  In  Jeremiah 
xxx.  10,  11,  we  find  a  remarkable  statement:  “Fear  not,  O 


26 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


Israel,  for  I  am  with  thee,  saith  the  Lord,  to  save  thee.  Though 
I  make  a  full  end  of  all  nations  whither  I  have  scattered  thee, 
yet  will  I  not  make  a  full  end  of  thee ;  but  I  will  correct  thee 
in  measure,  and  will  not  leave  thee  altogether  unpunished.” 
That  Israel  has  been  punished  and  corrected  no  one  will  deny 
who  is  acquainted  with  her  history  and  sojourn  from  the  time 
she  was  carried  captive  to  this  day.  But  has  the  other  part 
of  the  saying  been  fulfilled?  We  answer,  Yes — as  the  law 
of  colonisation  has  progressed.  The  Ancient  Britons  are 
no  more;  Saxon  Israel  has  entirely  supplanted  them,  just  as 
Manasseh  in  the  United  States  is  supplanting  the  aborigines 
or  Indians.  They  perish  and  disappear  like  snow  before  the 
rising  sun.  Not  all  we  can  do  on  the  line  of  legislation, 
philanthropy  and  religion,  is  sufficient  to  stay  the  ravages  of 
this  long-ago  declared  decree  of  Heaven.  Go  to  Canada, 
and  you  find  they  are  perishing;  in  Newfoundland  they  are 
entirely  gone,  and  in  every  other  province  they  are  fast  dis¬ 
appearing,  save  such  as  are  saved  by  incorporation,  by  mar¬ 
riage,  and  salt  stayed  by  the  power  of  Christianity ;  but  both 
these  remedies  are  only  temporal — they  perish  in  spite  of  all  in 
the  heated  atmosphere  of  Israel’s  civilisation.  Some  few 
tribes  may  hold  their  own  and  seem  to  increase,  but  such  does 
not  invalidate  the  evidence  of  the  decree.  For  they  have  per¬ 
ished  in  such  numbers,  and  so  uniformly,  when  in  contact  with 
Israel,  that  history  proclaims  the  decree  fulfilled. 

The  native  inhabitants  of  Van  Dieman,  called  Tasmanians, 
have  entirely  become  extinct.  The  Maories  of  New  Zealand  are 
rapidly  diminishing.  Sixty  years  ago  they  were  200,000  strong ; 
now  probably  less  than  50,000.  In  a  few  more  years  they  will 
be  gone.  The  same  is  true  in  all  the  other  Australian  provinces. 
The  same  is  true  of  many  isles  of  the  sea,  also  of  the  African 
colonies.  In  these  things,  so  exceptional,  we  can  surely  say, 
with  the  magicians  of  old  who  contended  against  Moses,  “This 
is  the  finger  of  God.”  Thus  we  see  Israel  increasing,  by  the 
law  of  diminution  going  on  among  the  Gentiles.  Israel  in  the 
latter  day  was  to  be  blest  with  plenty  in  the  orchards,  stall,  and 
field :  “For  I  will  lay  no  more  famine  upon  you,  saith  the  Lord.” 
We  have  recently  read  of  some  10,000,000  of  Chinese  perishing 
by  famine.  India,  in  parts,  has  been  greatly  reduced  in  num¬ 
ber  by  the  great  scourge.  This  country  will  be  partly  pro¬ 
tected  from  the  operation  of  this  law — for  no  doubt  a  large 
portion  are  from  Abraham.  “But  unto  the  sons  of  the  con¬ 
cubines,  which  Abraham  had,  Abraham  gave  gifts,  and  sent 
them  away  from  Isaac  his  son,  while  he  yet  lived,  Eastward, 
into  the  East  country”  (Gen.  xxv.  6).  This  same  scourge  does 
not  follow  the  colonising  of  other  nations.  It  did  not  follow 
Spain,  nor  the  Dutch,  nor  France. 

If  you  turn  to  the  prophets,  you  will  soon  learn  how  they  are 
to  increase  in  the  latter  days — not  by  a  comparison  on  the  line 
of  diminution  only,  but  in  and  from  themselves.  “Behold,  the 
days  come,  saith  the  Lord,  that  I  will  sow  the  House  of  Israel 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION 


27 


and  the  House  of  Judah  with  the  seed  of  man  and  beast” 
(Jer.  xxxi.  27).  Have  these  days  come?  We  again  say  Yes; 
and  these  kind  of  prophecies  are  being  fulfilled  in  this  day  in 
so  special  a  manner  as  to  make  certain  the  times  we  live  in. 
Through  Israel,  Judah  and  Manasseh,  the  earth  is  to  find  the 
equilibrium  of  peace.  The  Jews  will  furnish  the  money,  for 
in  the  increasing  ascendency,  and  multiplying  power,  and  au¬ 
thority  of  England  and  America,  the  Jews  will  draw  closer  to 
them  and  invest  more  and  more  their  money  with  them,  be¬ 
cause  of  greater  security  and  profit.  The  balance  of  power  and 
even  compulsion  will  be  in  the  hands  of  England  and  America, 
to  force  arbitration  on  disputing  nations,  and  they  will  do  so, 
having  set  the  precedents  themselves  in  the  Alabama  and  other 
treaties.  At  present,  many  will  refuse  this  idea,  and  point  Jo 
the  famous  Monroe  doctrine.  Now  that  doctrine  has  had  its 
time,  nearly :  and  it  has  served  a  good  purpose  for  the  country. 
The  mercantile  growth,  and  general  producing  power  of  this 
country,  will  cause  us  to  abandon  our  selfish  protection  policy ; 
for  of  all  other  people  on  the  face  of  the  earth  we  will  want 
free  trade ;  for  we  will  have  the  greatest  surplus  of  mercantile 
and  agricultural  productions,  and  in  a  short  time  our  very 
position  and  ability  will  push  away  all  competitors.  Once,  our 
mercantile  and  agricultural  interests  are  cast  in  other  nations, 
we  will  then  have  an  interest  in  their  wars  and  peace,  and  will 

be  led  to  interfere.  A  . 

The  chief  way  in  which  the  balance  of  power  will  tall  into 
English  and  American  hands  is  in  the  fulfilling  of  the  blessings 
of  the  text :  the  multiplying  of  this  people,  first  by  natural  in¬ 
crease,  and  second  by  incorporation  and  absorption.  ^ook 
at  this  law  of  absorption :  how  vigorous  and  sure !  If  you  turn 
into  a  field  of  grass,  fowls,  pigs,  horses  and  cows,  you  get 
chicken  meat,  pork,  horseflesh,  and  beef.  The  individualism  m 
each  creature  absorbs  and  converts  the  same  field  of  grass  into 
themselves.  So  into  this  country  are  coming  people  of  every 
nation  and  race,  but  the  individualism  of  Manasseh  will  m  due 
time  make  them  all  Manassehites.  The  children  of  the  Rus¬ 
sians  Poles,  Spanish,  and  so  on,  become  American  m  taste, 
manners,  and  sympathies.  They  are  being  grafted  into  the  tree 

^BuMookat  the  law  of  increase  naturally.  Take  the  popula- 
tion  of  several  countries  as  given  in  the  last  census,  and  care¬ 
fully  note  the  relative  increase,  and  how  long  it  takes  each 
nation  to  double  its  number.  Russia,  eighty-six  millions, 
doubles  every  100  years;  Germany,  forty-five  mi  lions,  doubles 
every  95  years  ;  Turkey,  forty-seven  millions,  doubles  every  o50 
vears  •  Austria  thirty-seven  millions,  doubles  every  100  years, 
France  thirty-six  millions,  doubles  every  140  years;  Great 
Britain'  thirty-three  millions,  doubles  every  55  years;  United 
States  forty  millions,  doubles  every  25  years;  Italy,  twenty- 
seven  millions,  doubles  every  125  years;  Egypt,  seventeen 
millions,  doubles  every  150  years;  Spam,  sixteen  millions, 


28 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


doubles  every  112  years;  English  colonies,  ten  millions,  doubles 
every  25  years.  Now  make  a  calculation  for  100  years,  from 
1878  to  1978,  and  see  how  these  countries  stand  in  population 
and  their  relative  position.  Russia  will  have  one  hundred  and 
seventy-two  millions;  Germany,  ninety;  Turkey,  fifty-six; 
Austria,  seventy-four;  France,  fifty-nine;  Great  Britain,  one 
hundred  and  thirty-seven ;  Italy,  forty-one ;  Egypt,  twenty- 
nine  ;  Spain,  twenty-eight ;  United  States,  six  hundred  and 
forty;  and  the  English  colonies,  one  hundred  and  sixty — and 
that  is  not  reckoning  the  natives  in  the  colonies,  only  the 
descendants  of  the  English.  Of  course,  in  a  country  like  India, 
the  natives  will  be  a  considerable  number,  and  they  might  prop¬ 
erly  be  reckoned  in  with  the  colonial  items,  and  so  swell  the 
number  of  Israel’s  power. 

Now  these  figures  show  a  wonderful  conclusion.  In  simple 
language  we  find  that  in  1978,  the  English-speaking  race,  or 
Israelites,  will  number  937  millions,*  while  all  of  Russia, 
Germany,  Turkey,  Austria,  France,  Italy,  Egypt,  and  Spain, 
will  only  number  543  millions.  Where,  then,  we  ask,  will  be 
the  balance  of  power?  And  why  should  this  certain  law  come 
into  operation  at  this  time,  if  it  be  not  the  blessing  foretold  by 
the  prophets?  And  can  we  not  see  that  these  are  the  latter 
days,  and  that  God  is  fulfilling  His  promises  to  Israel  ? 

The  blood  of  Abraham  and  the  faith  of  Abraham  have  been 
wonderfully  preserved  and  projected  down  through  the  cen¬ 
turies  with  telling  effect.  And  on  this  line  the  Darwinian  the¬ 
ory  of  election  is  very  true,  for  the  survival  of  the  fittest  is  the 
proclaimed  law  of  heaven.  There  is  power  in  land  possession 
and  there  is  power  in  number,  and  if  these  two  factors  main¬ 
tain  their  force  for  one  hundred  years,  then  we  infer  of  cer¬ 
tainty  that  the  sceptre  of  rule  and  destiny  of  the  world  will  be  in 
the  hands  of  Israel,  unless  the  laws  of  nature  are  reversed,  and 
the  promises  of  God  fail.  The  Word  of  God  cannot  fail  or 
return  unto  Him  void ;  it  must  accomplish  that  whereunto  He 
sent  it  and  prosper  in  things  designed,  or  as  Jeremiah  xxiii.  20 
says:  “The  anger  of  the  Lord  shall  not  return  until  He  has 
executed  and  till  He  has  performed  the  thoughts  of  His  heart ; 
in  the  latter  days  ye  shall  consider  it  perfectly.” 


*This  total  has  now  been  considerably  exceeded,  and,  of  course, 
the  other  countries  increased. 


29 


Discourse  V. — Israel  and  Language. 


Latter  Day  Prophetic  Promises — Time  of  Israel’s  Revival — 
Pyramid  Testimony — British  Islands  Population  in  1882 — 
Affinity  Between  English  and  Hebrew — Cell  of  the  Honey¬ 
bee — Origin  of  Language — Lion  of  Languages— Foreign 
Testimony — All  Tongues  Indigenous  but  English — The 
Premillennial  Tokens. 


“For  then  will  I  turn  to  the  people  a  pure  language,  that  they 
may  all  call  upon  the  name  of  the  Lord,  to  serve  Him  with  one  con¬ 
sent.” — Zephaniah  iii.  9. 

In  the  last  two  discourses  we  called  your  attention  to  two 
prophecies  that  are  now  fulfilling;  they  are  on  parallel  lines  of 
time  and  territory.  The  first  had  reference  to  the  rapid  accu¬ 
mulation  of  the  lands  of  the  earth  by  Israel.  Accepting  the 
Anglo-Saxons  as  being  the  children  and  descendants  of  Jacob, 
it  naturally  follows  that  the  prophetic  blessings  and  promises 
made  to  Abraham,  Isaac,  Jacob,  and  their  heirs  should  find 
a  fulfilment  in  these,  the  latter  days,  and  that  such  fulfi  - 
ment  should  be  found  in  the  English  Nation,  among  the  Jews 
and  in  the  United  States.  It  is  easy  to  see  and  believe  that 
the  curses  prophetically  pronounced  on  Judah  and  Israel  have 
been  fulfilled,  especially  on  the  House  of  Judah.  The  promises 
to  the  House  of  Israel  are  now  being  grandly  realised.  England 
is  in  possession  of  the  isles  of  the  sea,  the  coasts  of  the  earth, 
the  waste  and  desolate  places,  the  heathen  is  her  inheritance, 
and  she  is  inheriting  the  seed  of  the  Gentiles,  and  causing  their 
desolate  cities  to  be  inhabited.  From  the  taking  of  Jamaica, 
bv  General  Penn,  in  1655,  to  the  peaceful  cession  of  Cyprus 
the  course  of  this  little  island  nation  has  been  onward  and 
upward.  And  if  her  conquests  and  progress  are  not  amenable 
to  prophecy  for  an  interpretation,  then  the  wonder  is  still 
greater.  The  facts  are  with  us,  and  must  be  accounted  for 
some  way.  The  second  had  reference  to  the  multitudinous  seed 
of  Israel  in  the  latter  days.  Till  two  hundred  years  ago  the 
Anglo-Saxons  were  not  in  this  respect  distinct  from  other 
races  •  indeed,  for  centuries  they  were  distinct  rather  for  their 
weakness  in  multiplying  power  and  number.  Many  other  races 
have ^  exceeded  them"  in  this  particular  But  no  sooner  do  we 
come  abreast  of  the  latter  day  time  than  we  find  the  laws  of 
centuries  changed.  In  thermal  science  it  is  an  axiom  that 
heat  expands  ah  bodies,  and  of  course  that  cold  contracts  them 
But  to  this  general  rule  there  is  one  beautiful  and  benevolent 
exception :  if  is  in  water;  for  if  we  start  with  water  at  thirty- 
two  ^degrees,  we  find  the  remarkable  phenomenon  of  cold 
expanding  all  below  thirty-two,  and  heat  expanding  a  above 
If  we  take  water  at  212  degrees  and  withdraw  it  from  the  heat, 


30 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


it  will  continue  to  contract  till  we  reach  thirty-two;  then  the 
law  is  reversed,  and  the  water  expands.  Now  the  reversion  of 
this  law,  at  this  particular  point,  is  wonderfully  expressive  of 
Divine  forethought  and  benevolence.  By  such  a  change  ice  is 
made  to  float  in  water,  and  so  save  our  lakes,  streams,  and 
wells  from  being  frozen  solid.  As  this  exception  is  to  thermal 
science,  so  is  the  law  of  reproduction  to  Israel  in  this  day. 
This  people,  who  have  been  behind  other  races,  now,  at  an 
appointed  time,  step  to  the  front.  The  law  seems  to  be  reversed, 
and  that,  too,  for  a  benevolent  purpose — for  the  very  purpose 
that  they  might  be  able  to  fulfil  the  mission  assigned  them  in 
these  last  days,  to  occupy  the  new  lands  and  evangelise  the 
world.  One  prophecy  seems  to  call  for  the  other,  for  what 
would  be  the  use  of  the  lands  without  the  people,  or  the  people 
without  the  lands?  It  is  an  amazing  fact  that  Queen  Victoria 
should  bear  rule  over  one-third  of  the  population  of  the  whole 
earth,  and  that  Israel,  including  Manasseh,  should  own  one- 
fourth  of  the  land. 

But  this  amazing  fact  is  made  reasonable  when  we  accept  the 
Queen  as  being  of  the  seed  of  David,  and  an  heir  to  the  prom¬ 
ises  attaching  to  David’s  throne,  and  when  we  accept  the 
Anglo-Saxons  as  being  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes  of  Israel.  Then 
prophecy,  Providence  and  facts,  are  a  trinity — they  are  one 
sublime  whole.  God,  speaking  through  Moses,  said  He  would 
punish  to  reform  Israel  for  seven  times — and  seven  times, 
prophetically  understood,  means  2,500  years.  If  we  allow  that 
Israel  were  carried  captive  in  the  year  725  before  Christ,  then 
Israel  would  come  into  freedom  or  be  reformed  about  1,795, 
because  if  we  add  725  to  1,795,  we  get  2,520.  Up  to  this  point 
they  were  to  be  robbed  of  their  children  and  to  be  few  in  num¬ 
ber  (see  Lev.  xxvi.  22).  In  the  year  1,795  Israel  was  to  be  re¬ 
lieved  from  these  curses;  and  about  this  time  this  special  law 
of  reproduction  came  into  operation ;  or,  if  we  take  the  lamen¬ 
tations  of  Hosea  vi.  1 — 3 :  “Come  and  let  us  return  unto  the 
Lord,  for  He  hath  torn,  and  He  will  heal  us ;  He  hath  smitten, 
and  He  will  bind  us  up ;  after  two  days  will  He  revive  us  ; 
in  the  third  day  He  will  raise  us  up,  and  we  shall  live  in  His 
sight.  Then  shall  we  know  if  we  follow  on  to  know  the 
Lord.  His  going  forth  is  prepared  as  the  morning,  and  He 
shall  come  unto  us  as  the  rain,  as  the  latter  and  former  rain 
unto  the  earth.”  By  this  passage,  our  day  and  the  special 
providences  of  this  period  are  mournfully  and  graphically  re¬ 
ferred  to.  Here  a  day  stands  for  a  thousand  years,  “for  a 
day  with  the  Lord  is  as  a  thousand  years” ;  so  that  when  two 
thousand  years  should  have  passed  by,  Ephraim,  who  stands 
for  Israel,  was  to  be  revived  and  blessed  with  fruitfulness  some 
time  during  the  third  day,  or  thousand  years.  In  ancient  time 
a  day  was  counted  when  it  had  a  majority — that  is,  when  it 
had  passed  the  half.  The  prophet  here  says  we  were  to  be 
revived,  or  raised  up,  on  the  third  day.  So,  if  you  again  take 
these  three  thousand  year-days,  you  will  find  that  two  of  them 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE 


31 


are  to  be  completely  passed,  and  during  the  third  we  were  to 
be  raised.  The  number  we  have  given,  2,520,  exactly  meets  the 

interpretation - 2,000  complete  and  520  make  a  majority  for 

the  third  day  by  the  twenty  over  the  half.  These  prophetic 
figures  tally  well  with  the  existing  state  of  things.  About  the 
beginning  of  this  century  England  assumed  to  lead  the  world. 
It  is  a  remarkable  coincidence  that,  in  the  last  century,  the 
question  of  how  to  multiply  the  population  was  a  subject  of 
debate  and  legislation  in  the  British  Parliament.  But  what 
legislation  failed  to  do,  God  in  His  providence  did  at  the 
appointed  time. 

From  these  two  prophecies,  so  sublimely  fulfilling,  let  me 
invite  your  attention  to  another  that  is  now  maturing.  It,  too, 
is  parallel  with  the  other  two.  We  refer  to  the  peculiar  growth, 
power,  and  progress  of  the  English  language.  After  Israel 
went  into  captivity  they  were  to  lose  their  language  and  take 
or  form  another.  “For  with  stammering  lips  and  another 
tongue  will  He  speak  to  this  people”  (Isa.  xxviii.  11).  We 
will  all  agree  that  the  English  language  is  not  the  Hebrew ; 
and  if  we  are  Israelites,  then  indeed  God  is  speaking  to  us  in 
another  tongue,  for  few  of  us  read  His  Word  in  Hebrew.  It  is 
read  to  the  millions  in  the  English ;  hence  the  millions  hear 
God  speak  to  them  in  another  tongue  than  that  of  Hebrew. 
Between  the  English  and  Hebrew  languages  there  is  an  inti¬ 
mate  relation,  especially  back  a  few  years,  before  the  English 
had  grown  so  much.  The  Hebrew  was  a  very  limited  language ; 
not  numbering  more  than  7,000  words.  The  English  is  now  said 
to  number  about  90,000.  The  most  lavish  writer  does  not  use 
over  10,000 ;  the  common  average  is  about  3,000.  In  the  Eng¬ 
lish  we  have  not  less  than  1,000  Hebrew  roots.  This,  com¬ 
paring  the  languages  a  few  years  back,  is  a  large  percentage. 
In  names  of  persons  and  places  the  Hebrew  is  very  prominent 
in  England. 

I  take  it  for  a  fact  that  language  is  of  Divine  origin.  Men 
have  written  on  the  origin  of  language  from  every  standpoint; 
the  majority  of  them  trying  to  account  for  its  existence  without 
allowing  so  noble  a  source.  The  first  man,  Adam,  I  believe, 
could  talk  as  easily  and  naturally  as  he  could  see,  and  hear,  and 
taste.  Speech  was  a  part  of  his  endowment.  There  is  nothing 
more  wonderful  in  a  man  talking  than  a  bird  singing,  save 
that  speech  is  a  higher  order  of  utterance.  Dumb  nature 
performs  marvels  every  day  as  mighty  and  wonderful  as  man  s 
talking.  The  honey-bee  builds  its  cells,  ignorant  of  the  fact 
that  such  construction  is  the  solution  of  a  problem  which  had 
troubled  men  for  centuries  to  solve.  At  what  point  shall 
certain  lines  meet  so  as  to  give  the  most  room  with  the  least 
material  and  have  the  greatest  strength  in  a  building?  This 
problem  is  said  to  have  been  worked  out  by  a  Mr.  McLaugh- 
land  a  noted  Scotch  mathematician,  who  arrived  at  his  con¬ 
clusion  by  laborious  and  careful  fluxionary  calculation.  To  his 
surprise,  and  to  the  surprise  of  the  world,  such  lines  and  such 


32 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


a  building  were  found  in  the  common  bee  cell.  Now  I  hold  that 
the  same  Creator  who  gave  to  the  bee  the  mathematical  instinct 
could  endow  man  with  the  instinct  of  speech.  Even  to  animal 
instinct  we  find  a  certain  variation  and  permitted  latitude  in 
what  is  called  adaptive  instinct.  So  in  man  we  find  this  same 
instinct  of  adaptation  in  a  higher  sense.  The  instinct  comes 
into  play  when  we. suppose  a  number  of  persons  separated  from 
others,  each  living  in  different  quarters  of  the  globe.  In  such 
a  condition,  though  of  the  same  language  when  first  separated, 
they  would  not  remain  so  long — that  is,  in  the  primitive  state 
of  society.  Thus,  among  the  tribes  of  Africa,  at  this  day, 
languages  are  widening  and  varying  from  a  once  common 
centre.  So  Israel  in  captivity  would  lose  the  Hebrew  gradually. 
The  language  of  the  people  among  whom  they  settled  was  the 
Sanskrit,  from  which  a  score  of  languages  have  come- — the 
German,  French,  and  Italian,  Saxon  and  others.  The  Saxon  of 
to-day,  compared  with  the  Saxon  of  2,000  years  ago,  is  very 
different ;  so  much  so  that  for  us  to  learn  and  speak  it  would 
be  equal  to  learning  a  new  language.  Thus  the  English 
language  is  a  thing  of  growth.  In  the  year  1362  the  Saxon 
was  made  the  Court  language  of  England.  From  that  time 
onward  its  growth  has  been  wonderful. 

The  prophetic  outlines  and  Divine  place  of  this  language 
may  be  seen  in  the  germal  foundations,  which  give  unto  it  such 
vigour,  tenacity,  and  capabilities  of  expansion.  All  the  features 
of  this  language  go  to  show  that  it  is  destined  to  be  the  me¬ 
dium  of  a  world’s  intercourse,  and  that  it  very  suitably  belongs 
to  Israel,  in  whose  hand  will  be  the  destiny  of  the  world.  It 
is  the  lion  of  languages.  It  will  grow  anywhere,  and  by 
reason  of  its  tenacity  when  once  it  gets  a  foothold  it  abides.  It 
is  peculiarly  suited  to  the  humanities  of  every  race,  clime,  and 
condition ;  there  is  no  limit  to  its  expansive  adaptability.  It  is 
in  a  special  manner  voracious  in  the  destruction  of  other  lan¬ 
guages  ;  wherever  it  goes,  it  sounds  the  death-knell  of  all  the 
rest. 

Soon  as  this  language  entered  Britain,  it  began  its  work  of 
destruction.  Before  it  has  disappeared  the  real  British,  the 
Cymric  or  Welsh,  Erse  or  Irish,  the  Gaelic  of  Scotland,  and 
the  Manx  of  the  Isle  of  Man.  The  British  Keltic  is  entirely 
gone;  the  rest  are  only  local.  Besides  these  it  ousted  from  the 
island  the  Norse,  the  Norman-French  and  several  other  tongues 
that  tried  to  transplant  themselves  on  English  soil.  It  is  at 
work  in  every  part  of  the  globe  planting  itself  and  displacing 
others.  A  few  years  ago  French  was  the  language  best  suited 
for  a  traveller  on  the  continent.  But  this  has  changed.  Now 
English  is  by  far  superior.  And  why  is  it  that  English  is 
supplanting  all  others?  To  answer  such  a  question  in  a 
scientific  way,  one  cannot  do  better  than  quote  from  the  great 
and  learned  German  philologist,  Prof.  Grimm,  of  Berlin.  He 
says  of  it :  “It  has  a  thorough  power  of  expression,  such  as  no 
other  language  ever  possessed.  It  may  truly  be  called  a  world- 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE 


33 


language,  for  no  other  can  compare  with  it  in  richness,  reason¬ 
ableness,  and  solidity  of  texture.”  But  perhaps  the  most 
definite  and  distinct  testimony  given  by  a  foreigner  touching 
the  future  ubiquity  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  race  and  language,  is 
that  put  forward  by  Prevost  Paradol,  a  learned  Frenchman. 
He  says  “that  neither  Russia  nor  United  Germany,  supposing 
that  they  should  attain  the  highest  fortune,  can  pretend  to 
impede  that  current  of  things,  nor  prevent  that  solution, 
relatively  near  at  hand,  of  the  long  rivalry  of  European  races 
for  the  ultimate  colonisation  and  domination  of  the  universe. 
The  world  will  not  be  Russian,  nor  German,  nor  French, 
alas !  nor  Spanish.”  He  concludes  that  it  will  be  Anglo-Saxon. 

A  British  poet  has  presented  in  poetry  the  special  features  of 
several  of  the  European  languages,  which  we  give: 

“Greek’3  a  harp  we  love  to  hear; 

Latin  is  a  trumpet  clear; 

Spanish  like  an  organ  swells; 

Italian  rings  its  bridal  bells; 

France  with  many  a  frolic  mien, 

Tunes  her  sprightly  violin; 

Loud  the  German  rolls  his  drum 
When  Russia’s  clashing  cymbals  come; 

But  British  sons  may  well  rejoice, 

For  English  is  the  human  voice.” 

There  are  eight  languages  in  the  bounds  of  Christian  civili¬ 
sation  that  may  be  accounted  powerful,  because  they  are  the 
tongues  of  vigorous  people;  they  are  the  English,  Russian, 
German,  French,  Spanish,  Italian,  Portuguese,  and  Scandina¬ 
vian.  But  of  these  all  are  indigenous,  except  the  English, 
so  that  they  die  if  transplanted.  Look  at  this  country  and 
behold  what  a  cemetery  it  is  for  languages.  Once  the  French 
had  strong  hold  and  promised  to  abide  here;  but  it  is  now 
nearly  gone,  even  from  the  State  of  Louisiana  and  Canada,  the 
last  places  of  retreat. 

If  we  take  note  of  the  population  according  to  these  several 
languages,  we  shall  see  the  prophetic  future  of  the  English. 
It  is  spoken  by  about  ninety  millions,  Russian  seventy-five, 
Germany  fifty-six,  French  forty,  Spanish  thirty-eight,  Italian 
twenty-nine,  Portuguese  fourteen,  and  Scandinavian  nine. 
Within  the  control  of  the  governments  of  these  languages  we 
find  England  to  have  rule  over  255,000,000  people,  who  do  not 
as  yet  speak  English,  and  we  find  that  the  other  seven  have 
only  seventy-five  millions  outside  of  themselves.  Here  is  an 
important  difference.  If  we  look  at  them  by  territorial  limits, 
leaving  out  Russia,  we  find  the  English  language  to  own 
13,382,686  square  miles,  Germany  449,684,  French  571,578, 
Spanish  4,694,811,  Italian  114,466,  Portuguese  4,028,311,  and 
Scandinavian  1,308,830.  The  aggregate  number  of  square 
miles  possessed  by  these  six  languages  is  11,167,620,  which 
altogether,  you  see,  own  2,215,066  miles  square  less  than  the 
English.  The  balance  itself  is  more  than  Germany,  France,  and 


34 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


Spain  put  together.  The  English  language  is  divided  only  into 
two  governments,  but  the  other  six  are  divided  into  twenty- 
six,  all  of  which  governments  are  bitter  one  toward  the  other; 
each  trying  to  supplant  one  another,  while  England  and  the 
United  States  are  at  peace,  and  will  ever  remain  so.  In  one 
hundred  years  from  now  the  English  language  will  be  spoken 
by  a  thousand  million  people.  Thus  we  need  no  stretch  of 
fancy  to  see  that  what  the  prophet  speaks  of  in  the  text  will 
be  accomplished  in  due  time. 

This  language  will  soon  be  universal ;  by  common  consent  it 
will  become  the  language  of  the  world.  All  the  changes  going 
on  among  nations  forecast  its  ubiquity.  China,  by  an  imperial 
decree,  has  recently  added  to  her  language  700  English  words. 
Her  sons  by  the  thousand  are  with  us,  and  by  the  thousand 
they  are  learning  our  mother  tongue.  The  Japanese,  till  a  few 
years  ago,  carried  on  their  foreign  correspondence  through  the 
Dutch,  but  now  they  have  changed  to  the  English.  Besides,  in 
the  50,000  schools  in  Japan  English  is  being  taught.  If  science 
has  an  answer  for  this  strange  phenomenon,  so  have  we.  Ours 
is,  that  it  is  the  will  of  Heaven.  Confusion  of  tongues  came  at 
Babel  as  a  punishment.  By  this  means  heaven  scattered  the 
unwilling  descendants  of  Noah.  When  Noah  came  forth  from 
the  ark,  God  bade  him  multiply  and  replenish  the  earth — that 
is,  fill  it  up.  Babel,  however,  was  built  as  a  monument  of 
centralisation,  for  the  builders  gave  as  a  reason  for  building  it, 
“Lest  we  be  scattered  abroad  upon  the  face  of  the  earth.”  By 
a  confusion  of  tongues  they  were  scattered.  Since  then  we 
have  had  some  1,500  distinct  languages  and  some  3,500  col- 
loquials,  or  say  5,000  different  forms  of  speech.  At  the  pres¬ 
ent  time  600  of  the  primary  are  dead,  so  that  there  are  about 
900  languages  now  spoken  on  all  the  earth,  with  about  2,500 
colloquials. 

When  these  means  have  answered  their  end — namely,  to 
make  us  occupy  all  parts  of  the  earth — then  they  will  die  out. 
It  then  follows  that  as  the  world  fills,  languages  must  dis¬ 
appear.  So  they  do.  The  English  and  German  were  the  last 
languages  to  come  into  existence.  No  new  ones  are  now  being 
made.  Alphabets  are  increasing,  because  misisonaries  are  re¬ 
ducing  spoken  languages  among  the  heathen  into  a  written 
form.  The  Bible  is  translated  into  more  than  two  hundred  dif¬ 
ferent  tongues.  This  itself  will  only  lead  the  millions  back  to 
English.  All  ships’  papers  are  now  made  out  in  English  ex¬ 
cepting  the  French,  and  no  doubt  they  will  soon  have  to  follow 
in  the  wake. 

The  day  of  Pentecost  foreshadowed  the  universality  of  some 
language.  Pentecost  was  a  type,  and  the  English  is  the  anti¬ 
type.  The  strangers  from  Phrygia,  Pamphylia,  Libya,  Pontus, 
and  Cappadocia  mingled  with  the  Parthians,  Medes,  Elamites, 
Cretes,  and  Arabians.  They  all  heard  the  Gospel  in  their  own 
tongue.  The  different  tongues  made  a  wall  of  division,  making 
them  strangers  one  with  another;  but  the  Holy  Ghost  took 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULNESS 


35 


away  the  wall,  and  they  were  all  face  to  face,  able  to  under¬ 
stand  one  another.  The  same  power  that  here  multiplied  the 
gift  of  tongues — giving  to  some  several — surely  could  give  to 
Adam  one.  Away  with  a  faith  that  cannot  give  God  credit 
with  being  the  Author  of  language. 

No  sooner  do  we  see  England  in  guardian  possession  of 
Syria  than  the  idea  enters  in  the  scheme  of  reform  of  extend¬ 
ing  the  English  language.  The  Board  of  Directors  of  the 
Syrian  Protestant  College  at  Beyrout  have  shown  their  appre¬ 
ciation  of  the  new  era  of  British  influence  by  a  recent  vote, 
which  took  effect  on  the  1st  of  January,  1879,  all  instruction 
in  the  college  shall  be  through  the  English  language.  The 
Arabic  will  only  be  taught  as  any  other  dead  language.  This 
remarkable  action  shows  that  British  influence  in  Syria  is  here¬ 
after  to  be  more  than  simply  diplomatic ;  it  is  to  be '  an  all- 
pervading  and  controlling  power,  affecting  every  interest  of 
society.  Truly  another  Pentecostal  day  is  drawing  nigh — a  day 
when  all  the  world  shall  hear  the  Gospel  in  the  language  of 
Israel.  In  all  these  things  we  see  the  lively  tokens  and  pre- 
millennial  agencies  hastening  on  the  day  of  the  Lord. 


Discourse  VI. — Israel  and  Gentile  Fulness. 

Meaning  of  Gentile  Fulness — Blessing  through  Judah  and 
Ephraim — Best  Religion— J ews  Outwitted — Why  Ben¬ 
jamin  was  kept  at  Jerusalem — French  Protestantism — 
Gentile  Fulness  Contemporary  with  To-day — What  it  is — 
Exceptional  Turkey. 

“Now  if  the  fall  of  them  be  the  riches  of  the  world,  and  the  di¬ 
minishing  of  them  the  riches  of  the  Gentiles,  how  much  more  their 
fulness.” — Romans  xi.  12. 

Paul,  the  author  of  this  epistle  to  the  Romans,  tells  us  that 
he  was  an  Israelite  of  the  seed  of  Abraham  and  of  the  tribe  of 
Benjamin.  The  fact  so  conveyed  it  is  necessary  that  we  keep 
in  mind,  if  we  would  interpret  aright  this  epistle.  He  intro¬ 
duces  to  our  notice  three  parties :  the  Jews,  who  include  at  this 
time  the  tribes  of  Judah  and  Levi ;  the  Israelites,  who  embraced 
the  tribe  of  Benjamin  and  the  other  nine  tribes  that  had  been 
in  captivity  for  about  eight  hundred  years— the  whole  together 
are  generally  known  as  the  den  Lost  Tribes.  In  the  third 
party  we  have  the  Gentiles.  The  word  Gentile  usually  denotes 
and  includes  the  non- Jewish  nations  and  people.  The  Hebrew 
word  goyim,  in  early  Bible  history,  was  equivalent  to  our  word 
nation,  'it  finally  began  to  denote  any  people  who  were  not 


36 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


of  the  sacred  seed  of  Abraham.  The  Greek  word  so  rendered 
is  ethnos ,  which  means  a  multitude  or  nation.  In  the  New 
Testament  another  word  is  sometimes  used  in  a  more  limited 
sense — namely,  Hellenes,  which  is  translated  Greeks.  Ignorance 
of  these  three  parties,  their  place  in  Providence,  and  relation 
one  to  the  other,  has  given  rise  to  much  needless  controversy 
and  division  in  the  domain  of  theology.  Men  have  argued  for 
an  election  and  a  reprobation,  laying  great  stress  on  the  9th, 
10th,  and  11th  chapters  of  Romans,  that  is  in  no  wise  taught. 
The  election  Paul  deals  with  is  a  literal  one,  having  reference 
to  a  distinct  people,  whom  God  had  elected  for  a  special  work 
in  this  world.  This  people  God  calls  “His  people,”  “His  in¬ 
heritance,”  “His  chosen,”  “His  witnesses,”  “His  servants.” 
“This  people  have  I  formed  for  Myself ;  they  shall  shew  forth 
My  praise”  (Isa.  xliii.  21).  Hence  exclaims  the  Psalmist, 
“Blessed  is  the  nation  whose  God  is  the  Lord ;  and  the  people 
whom  He  hath  chosen  for  His  own  inheritance.”  . 

It  will  be  evident  to  any  careful  Bible  reader  that  God  called 
Abraham  from  Ur,  in  Chaldea,  from  His  own  kindred,  for  a 
special  design.  Through  Abraham’s  seed  Jehovah  designed 
that  blessings,  temporal  and  spiritual,  should  flow  to  all  na¬ 
tions.  He  selected  this  seed  for  His  own  training,  instruc¬ 
tion,  and  culture,  to  the  end  that  they  might  train,  instruct, 
and  evangelise  the  rest  of  mankind.  Through  Judah  was  to 
come  spiritual  blessings,  because  from  him  was  the  Messiah ; 
and  through  Ephraim,  as  representative  of  the  Ten  Tribes, 
was  to  come  temporal  blessings.  And  this  in  the  past  has 
been  the  order  of  providential  procedure;  it  is  the  present 
order,  and  it  is  to  be  the  future.  Look  and  verify  this  state¬ 
ment  and  order  by  an  examination  of  the  nations  of  the  earth 
at  this  time  by  asking  yourselves  the  question,  What  form  of 
religion  among  the  many  on  earth  is  best  suited  to  develop 
man,  to  conserve  his  truest  interest,  and  crown  hiai  with  the 
greatest  measure  of  peace,  plenty,  liberty,  and  security?  Surely 
to  this  question  there  can  be  but  one  answer — it  is  the  religion 
of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ.  And  it  is  evident  that  Christ  came 
of  the  tribe  of  Judah.  If  we  seek  among  the  nations  for  the 
best  form  of  civilisation  and  the  best  government,  we  shall  find 
the  same  to  be  in  the  bounds  of  Israel  and  Manasseh — England 
and  America.  Here  we  shall  find  individualism  the  best  de¬ 
veloped,  and  liberty  the  fullest  grown.  In  this  conclusion  the 
intelligent  of  every  other  nation  will  concur.  We  assume  no 
risk  in  making  this  statement.  Thus,  without  doubt,  the  world 
at  large  is  greatly  indebted  to  the  religion  of  Jesus,  who  was 
of  Judah,  and  to  the  Anglo-Saxons,  for  the  best  and  purest 
forms  of  political  organisations  or  governments.  The  Anglo- 
Saxons  being  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes,  it  therefore  follows  that 
God  has  carried  out  the  design  included  in  Abraham’s  call, 
and  the  promise  made  that  in  his  seed  should  all  the  nations 
of  the  earth  be  blessed.  To  us  it  seems  to  have  been  a  round¬ 
about  way.  Had  Israel  been  obedient  to  God  in  Palestine, 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULNESS 


37 


and  had  Judah  received  Jesus  as  the  true  Messiah,  the  state  of 
the  nations  most  certainly  would  have  been  very  different  to 
what  it  is  now.  Still,  through  all,  and  for  all,  the  purpose  of 
Heaven  has  been  carried  forward. 

In  studying  Providence  it  is  well  always  to  remember  that 
God  is  not  dependent  upon  the  harmonious  co-operation  of  His 
creatures  for  the  accomplishment  of  His  purpose.  He  can  gain 
His  ends  either  through  our  hate  or  love,  resistance  or  co¬ 
operation.  When  the  Jews  had  crucified  Christ,  they  naturally 
thought  they  had  cut  short  His  career  and  cut  off  His  influence  ; 
for  so  it  would  appear  by  all  human  reasoning.  Even  the  dis¬ 
ciples  did  not  see  how  He  could  be  the  Messiah  and  Deliverer 
of  Israel  when  He  allowed  Himself  to  be  crucified.  The 
hope  of  Israel  was  buried  with  the  dead  Christ.  They  had 
hoped  that  it  had  been  He  who  should  have  redeemed  Israel , 
but  this  hope  was  then  dead.  But  by  His  resurrection  they  saw 
through  the  secret  of  Providence,  and  they  saw  that  Goo  was 
fruitful  in  devising  a  way  of  escape,  and  able  to  bring  to  pass 
His  own  glorious  purpose.  So  Peter  voices  their  experience 
when  he  says,  “Blessed  be  the  God  aud  Father  of  our  Lord 
Jesus  Christ,  which  according  to  His  abundant  mercy,  hath 
begotten  us  again  unto  a  lively  hope  by  the  resurrection  of 
Jesus  Christ  from  the  dead.”  The  Jews  soon  found  out  they 
had  made  a  mistake  in  crucifying  Jesus,  for  the  risen  Christ 
was  mightier  than  the  teaching  Jesus.  They  had  crushed  a 
seed  to  the  earth  which  sprang  forth  in  renewed  beauty  and 
grace ;  whose  death  was  life  and  whose  loss  was  gain.  In  com¬ 
mon  parlance  they  had  been  outwitted.  They  slew  a 
man  and  He  rose  a  God.  They  in  wrath  offeied  a  sacrifice 
once  and  for  all,  even  for  the  very  sin  in  which  they  were  then 
indulging.  They  unknowingly  abolished  death,  and  brought  life 
and  immortality  to  light.  The  critical  and  unbelieving  Sad- 
ducees,  who  denied  another  life  than  this,  gave  aid  in  proving 
another  and  a  better;  for  Christ  risen  condemned  their  un¬ 
belief.  The  proud  and  ritualistic  Pharisee,  who  loved  the 
temple  and  its  gorgeous  ceremony,  destroyed  one  and  made 
the  other  of  no  avail,  for  in  the  planned  death  of  Jesus  they 
laid  the  foundation  of  another  and  grander  temple  one  com¬ 
posed  of  living  stones— and  made  the  temple  service  meaning¬ 
less  *  for  the  antitype  had  swallowed  up  the  type ;  the  real, 
the  ideal.  In  all  this  they  had  reasoned  on  a  human  plane, 
which  is  not  high  enough  to  wholly  overlook  and  explore  the 
kingdom  of  God.  Paul  in  1  Cor.  ii  7,  makes  this  matter  plain : 
“But  we  speak  the  wisdom  of  God  in  a  mystery ;  even  the  hid¬ 
den  wisdom  which  God  ordained  before  the  world  unto  our 
glory  which  none  of  the  princes  of  this  world  knew ;  for  had 
they  known  it,  they  would  not  have  crucified  the  Lord  ot 
p-lorv.”  jesus  committed  His  life  to  the  wave-tide  of  their  rage, 
and  was  floated  to  death  and  victory.  On  the  man  side  there 
was  purpose  and  hate,  and  for  this  they  were  responsible ;  and 
on  the  Divine  side  we  have  wisdom  and  love  working  out  the 


38 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


salvation  of  a  lost  race. 

Jesus  came  to  His  own  and  they  did  not  receive  Him.  Who 
were  His  own?  We  answer,  The  Jews ;  for  He  was  of  Judah. 
But  if  His  own  did  not  receive  Him,  we  ask,  Who  did?  The 
answer  is,  that  Israel  received  Him.  The  Israelites  in  the  land 
at  that  time  were  the  Tribe  of  Benjamin.  They  had  been 
providentially  selected  for  this  work  nearly  a  thousand  years 
before.  This  one  Tribe  of  Benjamin  has  a  very  peculiar  his¬ 
tory  ;  and  if  you  will  study  it  over,  it  will  greatly  serve  to  con¬ 
firm  your  faith  in  the  Divine  inspiration  of  the  Bible  and  the 
unity  and  forethought  of  Providence.  The  original  theocracy 
of  Israel  consisted  of  Twelve  Tribes.  This  theocracy  was  di¬ 
vided  under  Rehoboam,  Solomon’s  son  and  successor.  Ten 
Tribes  seceded,  and  formed  a  kingdom,  which  is  ever  after 
called  the  kingdom  of  Israel;  their  first  king  was  Jeroboam. 
But  it  is  very  singular  to  notice  that  one  of  these  Ten  Tribes  is 
lent  to  the  kingdom  of  Judah,  and  this  one  Tribe  is  Benjamin. 
In  this  was  the  Divine  provision  for  the  time  of  Christ.  We 
find  in  the  first  book  of  Kings,  eleventh  chapter,  that  Solomon 
displeased  the  Lord  by  his  wicked  ways,  and  the  Lord  said : 
“Forasmuch  as  this  is  done  of  thee,  and  thou  hast  not  kept 
My  covenant  and  My  statutes  which  I  have  commanded  thee,  I 
will  surely  rend  the  kingdom  from  thee,  and  I  will  give  it  to 
thy  servant  [Jeroboam  was  Solomon’s  servant  at  this  time]  ; 
notwithstanding  in  thy  days  I  will  not  do  it,  for  David  thy 
father’s  sake ;  but  I  will  rend  it  out  of  the  hands  of  thy  son. 
Howbeit  I  will  not  rend  away  all  the  kingdom,  but  will  give 
One  Tribe  to  thy  son,  for  David  My  servant’s  sake,  and  for 
Jerusalem’s  sake,  which  I  have  chosen.”  All  the  kingdom 
evidently  meant  the  Ten  Tribes.  The  same  truth  Ahijah,  the 
Shilonite,  taught  when  he  rent  his  new  garment  into  twelve 
pieces,  and  gave  to  Jeroboam  ten.  “And  he  said  to  Jeroboam, 
Take  the  ten  pieces ;  for  thus  saith  the  Lord,  the  God  of  Israel ; 
Behold  I  will  rend  the  kingdom  out  of  the  hands  of  Solomon 
and  will  give  Ten  Tribes  to  thee.”  Then  comes  in  the  reserve 
clause  again:  “But  he  shall  have  one  Tribe  for  My  servant 
David’s  sake,  and  for  Jerusalem’s  sake,  the  city  which  I  have 
chosen  out  of  all  the  Tribes  of  Israel.”  And  the  reason  for 
the  reservation  of  this  tribe  is  clearly  expressed  in  verse  36 : 
“And  unto  his  son  will  I  give  one  Tribe,  that  David  My  ser¬ 
vant  may  have  a  light  always  before  Me  in  Jerusalem.”  Now 
it  is  plain  why  this  Tribe  was  an  exception.  The  city  of  Jeru¬ 
salem,  God  says,  He  had  chosen  out  of  all  the  cities  of  Israel, 
because  to  this  city  would  the  Messiah  come.  And  beautifully 
agreeing  with  the  forethought  is  the  fact  that  when  the  Tribes 
had  their  lots  assigned  them  in  Palestine,  the  city  of  Jerusalem 
fell  in  the  portion  of  Benjamin. 

The  Tribe  then  were  owners  of  the  city,  and  they  received 
Christ.  The  disciples  and  first  followers  and  converts  were 
chiefly  from  this  Tribe  of  Benjamin.  After  this  Tribe  received 
Christ,  then  their  work  was  done  in  Jerusalem.  So  they  were 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULNESS 


39 


to  separate  from  the  kingdom  of  Judah,  and  seek  out  their 
own  brethren  and  unite  with  them.  The  time  of  their  separa¬ 
tion  had  been  foretold  by  the  prophet,  and  pointed  out  by  the 
Saviour.  The  time  of  their  departure  would  be  coincident  with 
the  siege  and  destruction  of  their  beloved  city.  So  cried 
Jeremiah  down  through  the  centuries,  “Oh,  ye  children  of 
Benjamin,  gather  yourselves  to  flee  out  of  the  midst  of  Jeru¬ 
salem,  and  blow  the  trumpet  in  Tekoa,  and  set  up  a  sign  of 
fire  in  Beth-haccerem,  for  evil  appeareth  out  of  the  North  and 
great  destruction”  (Jer.  vi.  1).  If  any  of  you  are  mindful  to 
examine  history,  you  will  find  that  war  came,  that  the  destruc¬ 
tion  was  terrible,  and  more,  you  will  find  that  the  Benjaminites 
escaped.  These  points  profane  historians  thoroughly  confirm. 
Having  fulfilled  their  God-appointed  mission  with  the  kingdom 
of  Judah  and  in  Jerusalem,  Heaven  gave  them  to  be  light- 
bearers  to  the  whole  world ;  first  to  specially  find  their  own 
brethren  of  the  House  of  Israel,  and  carry  them  the  Gospel, 
and  they  would  carry  it  unto  all  the  earth.  Thus  the  Saviour 
said,  “Go  not  in  the  way  of  the  Gentiles,  and  into  any  city  of 
the  Samaritans  enter  ye  not.  But  go  rather  to  the  lost  sheep  of 
the  House  of  Israel.”  Peter  in  his  epistle  tells  where  these 
lost  sheep  were  scattered.  Agreeable  to  the  Saviour’s  com¬ 
mand  they  went  forth,  and  preached  as  they  went,  and  so  car¬ 
ried  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  with  them.  As  a  Tribe  they  finally 
settled  in  Normandy,  and  gave  to  France  her  Protestantism, 
which,  from  that  day  to  this,  Catholicism  has  not  been  able 
entirely  to  uproot,  though  it  has  made  several  desperate  at¬ 
tempts.  They  finally,  however,  as  a  Tribe,  under  the  Norman 
conquest,  entered  England  and  united  with  the  other  nine 
Tribes.  Their  advent,  and  the  way  they  came,  is  very  graphi¬ 
cally  symbolised  in  the  unicorn  on  the  royal  arms  of  England. 
The  unicorn  is  looking  Westward,  and  is  attached  to  the  crown 
by  a  chain — showing  that  it  came  from  the  East. 

With  these  facts  in  one’s  mind,  read  those  difficult  passages 
of  Romans,  and  all  will  be  plain.  Take  for  instance  Romans 
xi.  17  :  “And  if  some  of  the  branches  be  broken  off,  and  thou, 
being  a  wild  olive  tree,  wert  grafted  in  among  them,  and  with 
them  partakest  of  the  root  and  fatness  of  the  olive  tree.”  Here 
it  is  manifest  that  we  have  three  parties  mentioned.  The 
branches  broken  off  mean  Judah  and  Levi,  the  wild  olive 
stands  for  the  Gentiles,  the  people  in  among  whom  they  were 
grafted,  or  root  of  whose  fatness  they  were  partakers,  mean 
the  Israelites.  The  hope  of  Jewish  restoration  is  nicely  set 
forth  in  verse  24 :  “For  if  thou  wert  cut  out  of  the  olive  tree, 
which  is  wild  by  nature,  and  wert  grafted  contrary  to  nature 
into  a  good  olive  tree,  how  much  more  shall  these,  which  be 
the  natural  branches,  be  grafted  into  their  own  olive  tree.” 
Again,  the  wild  olive  stands  for  the  Gentiles,  the  good  olive  tree 
for  Israel,  the  branches  broken  off,  but  which  may  be  grafted 
in  again,  for  the  Jews.  Thus  to  this  theory  of  interpretation 
the  whole  Bible  responds  easily  and  reasonably.  With  this 


40 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


kind  of  interpretation  one  need  not  twist  and  distort  the 
sacred  Word  in  order  to  understand  it.  I  trust  the  day  is  near 
when  men  will  expound  the  sacred  Scriptures  by  the  rules  of 
common-sense. 

The  calamity  that  happened  to  the  nine  Tribes  of  Israel  in 
being  carried  captive  has  been  turned  into  good  by  our  heavenly 
Father — into  good  for  them  and  all  the  world.  “Therefore 
the  Lord  removed  Israel  out  of  His  sight,  as  He  had  said  by 
all  His  servants  the  prophets.  So  was  Israel  carried  away 
out  of  their  own  land  to  Assyria  unto  this  day”  (2  Kings 
xvii.  23).  Keeping  back  the  tribe  of  Benjamin  is  a  marvel 
of  goodness.  And  with  Paul  we  may  exclaim:  “Now  if  the 
fall  of  them  be  the  riches  of  the  world,  and  the  diminishing 
of  them  the  riches  of  the  Gentiles,  how  much  more  their  ful¬ 
ness.”  If  Israel  had  been  able  to  contribute  so  much  of  Christi¬ 
anity  to  the  world,  and  evolve  in  her  imperfect  state  such  an 
equitable  form  of  government,  what  will  her  contribution  be 
when  gathered,  restored,  and  once  again  put  into  a  theocratic 
relation  to  God?  “For  if  the  casting  away  of  them  be  the 
reconciling  of  the  world,  what  shall  the  receiving  of  them 
be,  but  life  from  the  dead?”  This  people  who  have  been 
scattered  among  the  Gentiles  God  is  collecting  out  from  among 
them  for  His  own' glorious  purpose  and  work.  Thus  scattered 
they  have  been  a  mystery — a  mystery  among  the  Gentiles. 
Paul  to  the  Colossians  says  “To  whom  God  would  make  known 
what  is  the  riches  of  the  glory  of  this  mystery  among  the 
Gentiles,  which  is  Christ  in  you  the  hope  of  glory.” 

When  will  the  fulness  of  the  text  take  place?  We  answer, 
Before  long.  The  fulness  here  stands  over  against  the  Gentile 
fulness.  In  the  three  last  discourses  we  called  your  attention 
to  Israel’s  maturing  fulness  in  land,  people,  and  language. 
And  now,  if  you  will  consider  the  state  of  the  Gentile  nations, 
it  will  be  apparent  to  you  that  the  time  of  Gentile  fulness  is 
now  present.  These  Gentile  nations  are  now  overflowing. 
Take  China  with  her  teeming  millions,  and  ask  why  she  has 
not  peopled  the  world  ?  for  surely  she  could  have  done  so  long 
ago.  But  she  barred  her  own  doors  by  making  it  unlawful  for 
any  of  her  subjects  to  leave  the  flowery  kingdom — forbidding 
heaven  to  such  as  should  die  outside.  Now,  however,  she  must 
permit  emigration  or  perish  by  famine.  Take  the  countries  of 
Europe,  and  is  it  not  strange  that  Israel’s  fulness  of  land,  peo¬ 
ple,  and  language,  is  made  the  fuller  by  these  nations  con¬ 
tributing  toward  the  same?  The  fulness  of  the  Gentiles  is  made 
to  flow  into  the  fulness  of  Israel.  These  countries,  outside  of 
Israel  England,  have  no  colonies  to  send  their  overflow  to ; 
hence,  they  are  filling  up  the  domain  of  Israel  and  so  hasten¬ 
ing  on  her  fulness.  The  French,  Germans,  Italians,  and  Span¬ 
iards,  forsake  their  land  and  language,  thus  adding  to  Israel’s 
fulness ;  for  they  chiefly  settle  down  within  the  bounds  of 
Israel.  To  this  Gentile  fulness  there  was  to  be  one  strange 
exception— that  was  in  the  Turkish  nation.  This  nation  is  set 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULNESS 


41 


forth  by  the  prophets  under  the  figure  of  the  river  Euphrates. 
In  their  first  appearance  they  were  to  be  very  numerous.  In  the 
eleventh  century  they  began  to  invade  Europe.  The  historian 
Gibbon,  speaking  of  them,  says :  “Myriads  of  Turkish  horse¬ 
men  overspread  the  whole  Greek  Empire  until  at  last  Con¬ 
stantinople  fell  into  their  hands.”  From  1453  till  now  have 
they  held  this  grand  capital.  John,  in  Rev.  ix.,  pictures  this 
invasion,  and  speaks  of  the  number  of  horsemen.  He  speaks 
of  them  as  having  power  in  their  mouths  and  tails.  This 
language  is  very  expressive  when  we  remember  the  Moslem’s 
war-cry,  which  was,  “The  sword  of  Mohammed  and  of  God.” 
And  in  one  of  the  first  of  their  great  battles  they  lost  their 
standard ;  but,  not  long  baffled,  the  commander-in-chief  cut  off 
the  tail  of  his  beautiful  steed,  and  putting  it  on  the  end  of  a 
pole,  hoisted  it  as  a  standard.  This  ensign  they  long  used. 
This  kingdom,  however,  is  to  dry  up — that  is,  to  disappear 
gradually,  as  a  river  dries  up.  All  this  is  taking  place.  Turkey 
sends  emigrants  nowhere.  They  are  literally  dying  out.  In 
number  they  are  fewer  each  year.  Turkey  will  pass  away  for 
want  of  Turks.  Her  territory  will  be  taken  away  from  her 
gradually.  How  remarkable  the  dealings  of  Providence  with 
men  and  nations ! 

Up  to  the  point  of  Gentile  fulness,  Israel  was  to  be  partly 
blind,  for  God’s  plans,  through  Israel,  were  to  remain  a  mys¬ 
tery  for  a  time.  “For  I  would  not,  brethren,  that  ye  should  be 
ignorant  of  this  mystery,  lest  ye  should  be  wise  in  your  own 
conceits ;  that  blindness  in  part  is  happened  to  Israel,  until 
the  fulness  of  the  Gentiles  be  come  in  ”  _  Our  idea  is  that  the 
Gentile  fulness  is  now  in,  and  if  so,  it  is  natural,  then,  that 
Israel  should  be  found,  and  about  this  time  have  her  eyes 
opened.  Up  to  this  time  of  fulness,  Jerusalem  was  to  be  trod¬ 
den  down.  “And  they  shall  fall  by  the  edge  of  the  sword,  and  be 
led  away  captive  into  all  nations  ;  and  Jerusalem  shall  be  trod¬ 
den  down  of  the  Gentiles,  until  the  times  of  the  Gentiles  be  ful¬ 
filled  (Luke  xxi.  23).  Now,  the  Jews  did  fall  by  the  edge  of 
the  sword,  as  the  Saviour  foretold ;  they  were  carried  captive 
into  all  nations ;  Jerusalem  has  been  trodden  under  foot.  Thus, 
then,  do  we  see  three  parts  of  His  prophecy  literally  fulfilled, 
and  so  surely  will  the  fourth  part  be,  which  is,  that  in  connec¬ 
tion  with  Gentile  fulness  this  treading  shall  cease,  and  proud, 
imperial  Salem  shall  lift  her  head  once  more  free  from  tyrant 
hands  and  heathen  tramping,  to  become  the  city  of  God  and 
His  chosen  ones. 

When  Moses  was  sent  to  deliver  the  children  of  Israel  from 
Egypt  he  was  equipped  with  miraculous  power  that  he  might 
convince  Pharaoh  and  the  Egyptians  what  was  the  will  of 
Tehovah ;  but  not  more  so  than  are  the  prophetic  students  of 
this  day;  for  the  presence  of  the  Divine  gleams  forth  all 
around  in  the  miracles  of  prophecy  now  so  wonderfully  ful¬ 
filling  in  this  our  day. 


42 


Discourse  VII. — Dream  Image  of  Nebuchadnezzar. 

Future  History  of  the  World — The  Destruction  of  the  Papacy 
Commenced — Ireland  to  he  Free  and  Independent  of  Eng¬ 
land  and  Rome — Future  Glory  of  Britain  and  the  United 
States. 

“Thou,  0  King,  sawest,  and  beheld  a  great  image.  This  great 
image,  whose  brightness  was  excellent,  stood  before  thee;  and  the 
form  thereof  was  terrible.” — Dan.  ii.  31. 

About  2,500  years  ago  the  kingdom  of  Babylon  was  strong, 
great  and  prosperous.  The  king  of  this  vast  empire  is  known 
in  history  as  Nebuchadnezzar.  His  reign  had  been  marked 
with  great  victories  over  the  surrounding  nations.  The  mighty 
Empire  of  Assyria  he  had  conquered ;  Egypt  he  had  wasted  and 
almost  destroyed ;  Palestine  he  had  reduced  to  strange  and 
pitiable  desolation,  having  carried  the  Jewish  inhabitants 
captive  into  the  region  of  Babylon.  Among  these  captives  we 
find  Daniel,  the  prophet  of  Judah.  In  the  second  year  of 
Nebuchadnezzar’s  consolidated  reign,  as  king  over  Babylon  and 
Assyria,  he  dreamed  a  dream  which  gave  him  much  anxiety  of 
mind  and  troubled  him  very  much.  This  dream  he  could  not 
remember  nor  explain,  save  that  it  had  left  a  terrible  impres¬ 
sion  on  his  mind.  The  wise  men  were  confounded,  for  they 
could  neither  declare  the  vision  or  its  meaning.  The  king,  in 
his  rage,  decreed  them  all  to  death.  At  this  point  appears 
Daniel,  one  of  the  captives  of  Judah.  Moved  of  God,  he  pre¬ 
sents  himself  before  the  king  and  makes  known  to  him  the 
vision  and  interpretation. 

The  king  had  seen  a  great  metallic  image,  excellent  in 
brightness  and  terrible  in  form.  It  was  a  human  figure  of 
massive  proportions,  standing  erect  with  outstretched  arms, 
and  of  a  mixed  and  strange  composition.  The  head  was  of  fine 
gold.  The  breast  and  arms  were  of  silver.  The  belly  and 
thighs  of  brass.  The  legs  of  iron,  the  feet  part  of  iron  and 
part  of  clay.  While  the  king  was  gazing  on  this  monstrous 
figure  with  intense  interest,  his  attention  was  arrested  by  the 
appearance  of  a  small  stone — this  stone  was  alone;  there 
appeared  no  hands  handling  it  or  moving  it.  It  was  cut  out  of 
the  mountain  without  hands.  In  this  stone  there  appears  to  be 
a  good  deal  of  the  supernatural.  At  once  this  little  stone 
assaults  the  image,  beginning  at  the  feet.  The  battle  is  surely 
unequal ;  the  battle  continues,  and  during  the  struggle  the  stone 
actually  grows ;  the  image  falls  to  pieces — the  feet,  thigh, 
breast  and  head — and  victory  is  with  the  stone.  By  the  time 
the  image  is  wholly  destroyed  the  stone  has  become  a  moun¬ 
tain ;  or,  as  Daniel  said  to  Nebuchadnezzar,  “Thou  sawest  till 
that  a  stone  was  cut  out  without  hands,  which  smote  the  image 


DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR 


43 


upon  his  feet  that  were  of  iron  and  clay,  and  brake  them  to 
pieces.  Then  was  the  iron,  the  clay,  the  brass,  the  silver,  and 
the  gold  broken  to  pieces  together,  and  became  like  the  chaff 
of  the  summer  threshing-floors ;  and  the  wind  carried  them 
away,  that  no  place  was  found  for  them ;  and  the  stone  that 
smote  the  image  became  a  great  mountain  and  filled  the  whole 
earth.” 

In  this  vision  and  interpretation  we  have  a  line  of  history 
laid  bare  so  clearly  that  we  need  not  err.  The  beginning  is  the 
time  and  kingdom  of  Nebuchadnezzar.  The  image  stands  for 
four  great  earthly  monarchies,  extending  down  through  the 
centuries  even  to  this  time  and  day — and  a  little  further ,  for 
these  monarchies  are  not  yet  wholly  destroyed,  and  the  stmie- 
kingdom  does  not  yet  fill  the  world.  Of  this  fifth,  or  stone- 
kingdom,  there  is  to  be  no  end  by  conquest,  or  decay,  or  succes¬ 
sion.  Daniel  says  that  this  kingdom  shall  not  be  left  to  other 
people — that  is,  it  shall  never  be  succeeded. 

The  peculiar  features  of  the  stone-kingdom  make  it  interest¬ 
ing  to  ascertain  what  kingdom,  monarchy,  and  people  stand 
'or  it ;  for  such  kingdom,  though  small  at  the  beginning,  is  to 
.row  prosper,  and  continue  to  the  end  of  time.  Guided  by  the 
Scriptures  and  history,  let  us  look  for  these  four  earthly  mon¬ 
archies  ;  and  the  better  to  accomplish  our  task,  let  us  stretch 
the  giant  figure  on  his  back;  then  his  head  of  gold  will  rest  in 
Babylon,  his  silver  breast  and  arms  will  take  in  Media  and 
Persia,  his  belly  and  thighs  will  take  in  Greece,  and  his  legs  and 
feet  will  take  in  Rome.  Thus,  then,  the  gold  head  stood  ior 
Babylon,  and  is  now  in  this  day  represented  and  found  in  Rus- 
sia— -for  Russia  is  a  continuation  of  Babylon  The  Czar  is  on 
the  line  of  Nebuchadnezzar.  This  gold-headed  kingdom  will  be 
the  last  destroyed— the  destruction  begins  at  the  feet.  Russia 
therefore,  has  yet  a  lease  of  life  and  prosperity ;  but,  finally,  she 
too  will  yield  the  contests  and  disappear  before  the  stone-kmg- 
dom  The  gold  stands  for  work  and  endurance,  as  the  head  is 
significant  of  supremacy ;  but  the  stone  will  finally  destroy  it 

The  silver,  next  in  value  and  endurance,  of  which  were  t 
arms  and  breast,  stands  for  Persia.  Centuries  ago  Persia  was 
the  -reat  Power  of  the  earth.  At  one  time  it  would  seem  as  if 
she  never  would  decay  or  ever  have  a  rival ;  but  her  day  came, 
and  she  has  dwindled  down  to  the  little  kingdom  and  monarchy 
—the  Persia  of  to-day.  Her  power  is  gone,  she  is  consumptive 
and  will  soon  disappear  as  a  separate  kingdom.  The  present 
visit  of  the  King  of  Persia  to  the  Czar  at  St.  Petersburg  is 
not  without  meaning.  The  gold  head  of  Russia  w.ll  need  the 
assistance  of  the  arms  of  Persia  by-and  bye.  . 

The  brass  parts  stand  well  and  appropriately  for  ancien 
Greece — an  Empire  once  so  gigantic  and  powerful  a  PeoPle 
polished  and  learned,  but  long  ago  their  time,  and  work,  and 
nlace  were  marked  out.  And  now  the  time  is  nearly  gone  and 
the  work  done,  hence  they  will  soon  disappear.  1  he  present 
little^ kingdom  of  Greece  is  all  that  is  left.  Brass  is  m  itself 


44 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


corrosive,  so  the  Greek  Empire  has  gradually  eaten  itself 
away.  What  sublime  lessons  the  prophets  of  old  taught  us ! 

The  iron  and  clay,  of  which  were  the  legs  and  feet,  stand  for 
the  great  Roman  Empire,  which  in  its  day  was  so  solid  and 
grand  with  its  law  and  order,  its  soldiers  and  statesmen.  This 
Empire  that  tried  the  hopeless  experiment  of  mixing  clay  and 
iron — that  is,  Church  and  State  as  inaugurated  by  Constan¬ 
tine.  This  nation  that  tried  to  fuse  together  Paganism  and 
Christianity.  This  nation  that  tried  to  stand  on  two  equal  feet, 
and  to  encompass  the  whole  of  man,  body,  and  spirit.  Well 
might  Daniel  say  of  this  brittle  Empire  that  it  should  be  partly 
strong  and  partly  weak.  In  conscience  and  the  empire  of  the 
soul  Christ  alone  is  King.  No  wonder  that  the  Roman  Empire 
has  disappeared.  The  iron  part  is  now  entirely  gone.  The 
Pope  and  the  Church  of  Rome  foolishly  arrogate  to  themselves 
to  be  this  kingdom.  They  still  try  and  believe  in  mixing  the  iron 
and  clay — they  yet  claim  authority  in  the  spirit  realm.  Obedi¬ 
ence  to  Christ  and  the  Pope  cannot  be  on  the  spiritual  or  clay 
side.  No  man  can  supremely  serve  two  masters.  On  the  iron 
side  no  man  can  be  loyal  to  his  country  and  the  Pope  at  the 
same  time.  No  man  can  serve  two  masters  at  the  same  time, 
both  of  which  claim  and  demand  supremacy.  These  things 
cannot  be  mixed.  “And  whereas  thou  sawest  iron  mixed  with 
miry  clay,  they  shall  mingle  themselves  with  the  seed  of  men, 
but  they  shall  not  cleave  one  to  another,  even  as  iron  is  not 
mixed  with  clay.” 

How  true  the  prophetic  utterances  of  the  prophet !  The 
Catholics  and  Protestants  do  not  mix  easily,  not  socially,  not 
politically,  not  educationally.  How  are  we  to  mix  freely  with 
those  who  think  we  are  heretics  and  damnable  ?  How  can  we 
socially  mix  with  a  people  so  lordly  in  their  claims  and  deficient 
in  character  as  many  are — a  people  who,  when  true  to  their 
profession,  must  be  our  secret  or  open  enemies — who  sink  their 
manhood  and  parental  claims,  so  as  to  depend  upon  the  priest 
for  forgiveness  and  on  him  for  instruction?  Thus,  at  the 
priests’  command,  the  coming  generations  are  divided  and 
embittered  in  the  fact  of  separate  schools  for  Catholics  and 
Protestants.  These  men  of  clay  and  lordly  air,  claim  rights 
superior  to  the  State,  despising  the  State  provision  for  educa¬ 
tion.  Daniel  said,  “The  dream  is  certain,  and  the  interpreta¬ 
tion  thereof  sure.”  If  so,  as  sure  as  the  iron  part  has  dis¬ 
appeared,  so  will  the  clay. 

Now  a  clearer  view,  a  purer  faith  and  greater  liberty  are 
dawning  upon  our  Catholic  friends,  which  is  making  many  of 
them  feel  too  manly  and  noble  to  be  longer  slaves  to  priests  or 
Pope.  Bereft  of  temporal  power,  they  henceforth  will  have 
to  win  and  fight  their  way,  as  others,  on  the  purity  of  their 
doctrines  and  practice.  In  such  a  strife  we  can  but  wish  them, 
and  all  who  love  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  great  success. 

Thus  in  the  short  outline  of  these  four  kingdoms  we  see 
enough  to  show  us  that  God  has  kept  His  word.  How  marvel- 


DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR 


45 


lous  are  His  ways !  how  complete  His  work ! 

Let  us  now  look  at  this  stone-kingdom.  This  fifth  kingdom 
is  as  much  material  and  political  as  the  other  four,  and  stands 
for  a  king,  country  and  people.  It  does  not  come  into  exist¬ 
ence  until  the  image  is  perfect.  For  it  is  while  Nebuchadnezzar 
was  looking  at  the  image  he  saw  the  stone  cut  out  of  the  moun¬ 
tain — its  growth  was  gradual.  Its  work  was  to  destroy  this 
image  and  fill  the  world.  As  these  kingdoms  became  weaker 
and  smaller,  it  would  become  stronger  and  larger.  _ 

What  king,  country,  and  people  respond  to  this  kingdom . 
The  answer  is  as  easy  as  to  find  the  other,  if  we  keep  our  minds 
free  from  prejudice  and  open  to  truth. 

First,  this  kingdom  was  of  Divine  origin.  Second,  it  was 
small  at  first.  Third,  the  more  it  fights,  the  more  it  grows. 
Fourth,  it  breaks  in  pieces  this  image,  beginning  at  the  feet. 
It  is  in  fact  the  sworn  enemy  of  all  the  four  kingdoms.  Fifth, 
it  is  to  fill  the  world  and  thus  become  a  universal  kingdom  and 
monarchy.  In  this  latter  sense  it  will  be  a  fit  type  of  the  king¬ 
dom  of  Christ. 

Just  such  a  kingdom  as  this  did  God  repeatedly  promise 
to  Abraham  and  his  descendants.  David’s  throne  and  seed 
royal  are  to  be  established  before  Him  for  ever.  He  promised 
to  David’s  throne  perpetuity,  and  that  David’s  seed  should 
always  be  on  the  throne— not  in  a  spiritual  sense  as  some 
think — but  naturally  and  actually  in  this  world.  . 

God  promised  to  Israel,  as  a  people  and  a  kingdom,  such 
pre-eminence  in  origin,  power,  and  growth.  The  answer  then, 
is  simple  and  plain— England,  as  representing  the  Lost  iribes 
of  Israel,  and  Queen  Victoria  being  a  direct  descendant  from 
David.  For  she  came  of  James  VI.,  of  Scotland— he  from 
Bruce  and  Duncan,  and  Malcolm,  and  Kenneth,  and  Kenneth 
through  the  kings  of  Argylshire,  Alpm,  and  Donald,  and 
Fergus.  Then  through  the  long  line  of  Irish  Kings  from 
Earca  to  Heremon,  of  Tara,  and  he  married.  Tea  Teplu,  the 
daughter  of  Zedekiah,  who,  through  Jeremiah  the  prophet, 
had  been  hid  from  the  destroying  vengeance  of  Nebuchadnez¬ 
zar.  He  killed  all  her  brothers  and  kindred,  and  put  out  the 
eyes  of  Zedekiah  and  took  him  a  captive  to  Babylon,  where  he 

dl<Look  also  at  the  British  nation,  learned  as  they  are,  yet  no 
historian  can  tell  who  the  English  were  originally. .  Sharon 
Turner,  the  best  and  most  trustworthy  on  the  origin  of  the 
Saxons  fails  to  solve  the  question.  He  traces  them  into  Cen¬ 
tral  Asia,  but  there  he  stops.  They  here  form  part  of  the  Aryan 
race  sneaking  the  Sanscrit  language,  from  which  came  the 
Greek  and  Latin.  And  from  this  place  and  people  came  forth 
the  Goths  and  their  language,  and  also  the  Saxons  and  t  e 
language  came  to  view  here.  The  German  and  Saxon  botl 
seem  to  have  come  forth  from  the  Aryan  stock. 

The  very  place  the  Saxons  came  from  is  the  very  place  where 
the  Lost  Tribes  were  carried  captive  to  by  the  King  of  Assyria, 


46 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


about  725  years  before  Christ,  as  we  read  in  the  second  book  of 
Kings,  seventeenth  chapter.  Take  the  very  word  Saxon. 
This  word  comes  from  the  Sanscrit:  Saka  Suna.  Saka  means 
era,  epoch,  or  date,  and  Suna  means  void,  without.  Hence  the 
word  Saxon  means  a  people  whose  origin  is  unknown — void  of 
date.  True,  Nebuchadnezzar  saw  no  hands  cutting  the  little 
stone  out  from  the  mountain.  The  origin  of  the  English 
nation  is  hid  because  God  cast  away  His  people  for  a  time — not 
for  ever.  It  is  this  view  of  the  stone-kingdom  that  corresponds 
to  the  prophets,  to  history,  especially  to  the  English  history. 

The  very  island  itself  is  insignificant,  and  no  doubt  was  once 
joined  to  the  continent  of  Europe.  The  formation  on  both 
sides  of  the  English  Channel — that  is,  on  the  French  and  Eng¬ 
lish  coasts — is  the  same,  namely,  chalk.  The  ocean  in  time 
past  washed  through  a  passage,  and  thus  prepared  a  place  for 
exiled  Israel  to  rest  in,  and  renew  their  strength. 

Why  should  this  small  island  and  few  and  scattered  people 
become  so  powerful,  so  as  to  sweep  the  sea,  and  dictate  on  land, 
constantly  engaged  in  war,  and  though  small,  winning  victory 
upon  victory,  and,  like  the  stone,  growing  stronger  and 
stronger,  after  fighting  the  whole  of  Europe,  giving  liberties  in 
religion  that  oftentimes  imperilled  her  safety  at  home,  opening 
her  ports  to  all  the  world,  and  venturing  to  compete  in  trade 
with  all  nations? 

How  came  they  to  take  India,  a  country  of  so  vast  an  ex¬ 
tent,  so  powerful,  rich,  and  chivalrous  a  country,  at  that  time 
composed  of  sixteen  separate  and  powerful  nations,  speaking 
thirty-six  different  languages,  and  numbering  in  population 
some  200,000,000? 

With  all  her  faults,  still  to  her  the  world  owes  much.  She 
has  stood  for  liberty  in  person  and  conscience.  The  world  has 
little  to-day  which  ennobles  men  and  nations  but  what  she  has 
produced  or  aided  in  producing. 

The  right  foot  of  the  image  stands  for  France,  while  the 
left  signifies  Spain.  On  these  two  feet  long  stood  Rome,  as  all 
know.  When  these  two  feet  were  broken,  then  soon  followed 
the  downfall  of  Rome  as  an  empire,  and  as  they  are  con¬ 
quered  for  Jesus,  so  will  the  empire  of  Rome,  as  a  Church,  fall. 

In  the  year  1346  took  place  the  battle  of  Crecy,  led  by 
Edward  III.  Then  the  little  stone  fell  on  the  right  foot,  and 
since  then  it  has  fallen  on  that  same  foot  victoriously  218  times. 
On  the  left  foot,  Spain,  thirty-five  times.  All  this  time  this 
stone  has  been  growing.  In  1665  the  English,  under  General 
Penn,  took  Jamaica,  and  every  four  years  since  they  have  added 
a  colony.  Now  that  little  stone  bears  rule  over  fifty-five 
colonies,  one  empire — namely,  India — and  one  dominion,  Can¬ 
ada.  And  yet,  mighty  as  England  was,  she  could  not  sub¬ 
due  the  American  provinces,  feeble  and  scattered  colonists 
as  they  were.  Then  they  sought  to  fight  against  Providence. 
Old  Jacob  blessed  the  sons  of  Joseph,  Ephraim,  and  Manasseh, 
and  then  predicted  their  destiny,  saying  of  Manasseh,  “He  also 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY 


47 


shall  become  a  people,  and  he  also  shall  be  great ;  but  truly  his 
younger  brother  shall  be  greater  than  he,  and  his  seed  shall 
become  a  multitude  of  nations.”  So  they  are ;  and  so  Manasseh 
is  a  great  people  in  the  American  nation. 

This  stone,  cut  out  of  the  mountain,  has  much  to  do  and 
destroy ;  it  is  still  watching  the  head  of  gold.  Israel  and 
Babylon  are  still  face  to  face.  Greece  will  first  disappear, 
although  England  is  trying  to  revive  it.  Next,  Persia  will  go, 
then  Babylon,  or  head  of  gold.  Russia  will  have  grown  to 
giant-like  proportions,  and  will  finally  measure  swords  with 
England.  The  stone  will  win.  England  will  then  move  her 
royal  residence  and  throne  to  Jerusalem.  Every  country  and 
province  may  then  be  independent,  like  Canada,  but  federated 
to  the  central  government.  Ireland  will  then  be  free,  yes, 
doubly  free — free  from  Rome  and  free  from  England  as  a 
State  but  still  federated  to  the  central  government.  It  is  thus 
this  stone  will  fill  the  earth.  America  will  federate,  the  cen¬ 
tral  government  will  be  destroyed.  State  rights  increase. 
These  are  some  of  the  things  suggested  and  taught  by  this 


vision. 


Discourse  VIII.— -Little  Horn  and  Turkey. 

The  Turks  the  Ishmaelites - — England  and  Russia  to  Partition 
the  Mahommedan  Empire — Why  England  Sympathises 
with  Turkey. 


of  them  came  forth  a  little  horn,  which  waxed 


the  pleasant  land.” — Daniel  viii.  9. 


of  King  Ahasuerus  and  Queen  Esther.  In  other  words,  the 


48 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


scene  is  changed  from  the  palace  of  Babylon  to  the  Palace  of 
Persia. 

In  this  vision,  Persia  is  typified  by  a  ram,  the  two  horns  of 
which  represented  Persia  and  Media,  for  they  formed  one 
Empire  at  this  time,  under  the  powerful  rule  and  reign  of 
Cyrus,  who,  coming  from  the  East,  pushed  his  conquests 
“Westward,  and  Northward,  and  Southward.”  “The  two 
horns  were  high ;  but  one  was  higher  than  the  other,  and  the 
higher  came  up  last.”  From  history  we  know  that  Media  con¬ 
quered  Persia,  and  we  know,  also,  that  finally  Persia  gained 
ascendency,  so  that  the  higher  came  up  last,  and  is  even  in 
existence  to-day  as  the  small  kingdom  of  Persia ;  but  Media  has 
long  since  disappeared. 

While  the  seer  Daniel  was  considering,  behold  a  he-goat 
came  from  the  West.  This  goat  had  a  notable  horn  between 
his  eyes.  Horn  generally  symbolises  power ;  here  it  symbolises 
a  king  of  peculiar  power,  Daniel  tells  us.  Goat-like,  it  bounded 
over  the  earth  rapidly,  pushing  and  goring  its  adversaries. 
Can  anyone  at  all  acquainted  with  history  fail  to  see  how  fitly 
and  grandly  this  description  of  the  goat  forecasts  the  origin 
and  progress  of  the  Greek  Empire? 

Substitute  Alexander  the  Great  for  the  notable  horn,  and 
you  at  once  mate  history  and  this  vision.  Surely  God  has  not 
left  Himself  without  witnesses.  “Then  the  magicians  said 
unto  Pharaoh,  This  is  the  finger  of  God.”  So  we  may  freely 
say  unto  the  historians  and  students  of  history.  Truly  in  these 
things  we  see  the  finger  of  God. 

Could  any  historian  describe  more  faithfully  and  accurately 
the  invasions,  conquests  and  victories  of  Alexander  the  Great, 
especially  his  assault  on  the  Persians?  How  marvellous  and 
simple  the  description  by  Daniel:  “And  he  came  to  the  ram 
that  had  two  horns  (Persia),  which  I  had  seen  standing  before 
the  river,  and  ran  unto  him  in  the  fury  of  his  power;  and  I 
saw  him  come  close  unto  the  ram,  and  he  was  moved  with 
choler  against  him,  and  smote  the  ram,  and  break  his  two 
horns ;  and  there  was  no  power  in  the  ram  to  stand  before  him ; 
but  he  cast  him  down  to  the  ground,  and  stamped  upon  him; 
and  there  was  none  that  could  deliver  the  ram  out  of  his  hand.” 

And  with  the  same  majestic  simplicity  we  have  the  downfall 
of  Alexander  and  the  division  of  his  Empire  described.  Listen ! 
“Therefore  the  he-goat  waxed  very  great;  and  when  he  was 
strong  the  great  horn  was  broken;  and  for  it  came  up  four 
notable  ones  towards  the  four  winds  of  heaven.” 

To  fully  understand  the  sacred  writer  here,  you  must  call  to 
mind  a  little  of  history,  more  the  better,  for  all  knowledge  only 
aids  us  the  better  and  better  to  read  the  Bible. 

What  beast,  save  the  goat,  could  characterise  Alexander  and 
his  reign?  He  was  the  son  of  Philip  of  Macedon,  born  356 
B.C.,  and  died  in  323.  He  began  his  reign  at  twenty  years  of 
age,  and  closed  it  in  twelve  years  and  eight  months.  No  man 
in  the  same  time  ever  fought  so  many  battles,  won  so  many 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY 


49 


victories,  and  subdued  so  many  people.  No  man,  before  or 
since,  ever  ruled  over  so  many  people  and  such  a  kingdom. 
Queen  Victoria  is  in  these  things  his  only  rival.  But  with  his 
sudden  death  the  fruits  of  his  victories  are  re-distributed.  His 
Empire  was  divided  into  four  parts ;  the  four  Diadochi  were 
his  successors.  What  lessons  may  men  and  nations  learn  by 
studying  the  prophecies ! 

“For  prophecy  came  not  in  old  time  by  the  will  of  man;  but 
holy  men  of  God  spake  as  they  were  moved  by  the  Holy 
Ghost;”  and  unto  this  sure  word  of  prophecy  we  do  well  to 
take  heed,  as  unto  a  light  that  shineth  in  a  dark  place.  “Know¬ 
ing  this  first,  that  no  prophecy  of  the  Scripture  is  of  any  private 
interpretation”  (2  Peter  i.  20).  As  naturally  as  nature  re¬ 
sponds  to  the  seasons,  so  will  providence  to  prophecy.-  We 
can  discern  spring-time,  summer,  autumn,  and  winter.  The 
garden  will  reveal  to  us  winter  as  distinct  from  summer,  so  in 
interpreting  prophecy  we  must  always  look  for  an  agreement 
between  providence  and  the  world.  As  naturally  as  the  goat 
symbolises  Alexander,  so  will  providence  in  national  history 
respond.  Winter,  with  its  winds,  storms,  and  frost;  with  its 
leafless  trees  and  desolate  gardens,  proclaim,  beyond  a  doubt, 
which  season  of  the  four  is  bearing  rule.  Such  a  thing  cannot 
be  of  private  interpretation ;  and  prophecy,  when  fulfilled,  is  as 
easy  seen,  and  is  not  of  private  interpretation.  A  man  is  as 
foolish  in  forging  prophecy  as  one  would  be  in  trying  to  forge 
winter  by  putting  artificial  leaves  on  trees,  and  flowers  on 
bushes.  The  thing  is  easily  known  if  we  exercise  our  reason. 
In  this  line  of  thought  we  are  sorry  to  note  that  men  have  more 
faith  than  reason ;  hence  the  blunderings  of  prophetic  writers, 
and  the  leaders  of  Adventism  and  Millenarianism.  Prophecy 
unfulfilled  commands  and  demands  our  faith — much  more 
faith  than  reason,  for  it  is  impossible  to  see  how  some  things 
can  come  to  pass;  but  if  they  are  subjects  of  prophecy  they 
surely  will,  whether  we  understand  them  or  not.  A  prophecy 
fulfilled,  however,  appeals  more  to  reason  than  faith,  for  if 
fulfilled,  it  can  readily  be  demonstrated. 

As  naturally  as  the  female  and  male  birds  know  each  other 
and  mate  together,  so  will  events  and  prophecy.  This  kind  of 
argument  Isaiah  uses :  “Seek  ye  out  of  the  Book  of  the  Lord 
and  read;  no  one  of  these  shall  fail,  none  shall  want  her  mate, 
for  My  mouth  it  hath  commanded,  and  His  Spirit  it  hath 
gathered  them”  (Isa.  xxxiv.  16).  I  charge  you  to  beware  of 
prophetic  dentists  who  put  false  teeth  in  the  mouth  of  prophecy 
— who,  by  their  haste  and  impatience,  forestall  prophecy  and 
weaken  men’s  faith  instead  of  strengthening  it.  Prophetic 
evidence  is  very  strong  evidence,  both  for  the  Christian  and 
the  infidel. 

Some  will  fail  to  be  convinced  when  prophecy  is  fulfilled. 
Jew-like,  they  will  blind  their  eyes  and  shut  their  ears  to  the 
evidences  and  voice  of  fulfilled  prophecy.  The  entire  career  of 
our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  was  foretold  and  mapped  out  by  the 


50 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


Old  Testament  writers.  Moses  declared  His  family ;  Micah  the 
place  of  His  birth;  Isaiah  the  virginity  of  His  mother;  Zecha- 
riah  His  triumphant  entry  into  Jerusalem;  David  His  life,  res¬ 
urrection,  and  ascension,  with  many  other  kinds  of  evidence  of 
a  detailed  and  general  character ;  yet  the  Jews,  who  claimed  to 
be  well  versed  in  the  Old  Testament,  rejected  Christ.  Keep 
these  things  in  mind  while  we  now  consider  the  text  more 
directly. 

You  remember  that  out  of  the  goat  kingdom  there  came 
up  four  notable  ones,  and  out  of  one  of  them  came  forth  a  little 
horn,  which  waxed  exceeding  great  toward  the  South,  East, 
and  pleasant  land,  or  land  of  Palestine.  Now  this  horn  is  not 
to  be  confounded  with  the  little  horn  of  the  fourth  kingdom 
spoken  of  in  chapter  vii.,  for  that  horn  might  justly  be  called 
the  eleventh  toe  horn,  as  it  comes  into  existence  after  the  ten- 
toe  kingdoms.  The  little  horn  of  the  text  is  explained  in  verse 
23  to  be  a  king  of  fierce  countenance.  He  was  to  appear  in 
the  latter  time.  It  will  be  interesting  for  us  to  ascertain  what 
king,  people,  and  country  this  little  horn  stands  for.  Daniel 
has  given  us  a  very  vivid  picture  of  the  king.  He  is  to  be 
of  fierce  countenance,  to  understand  dark  sentences,  to  stand 
up  in  power  and  might,  not,  however,  in  his  own  power;  he 
will  claim  to  be  appointed  and  authorised  of  God,  and  will 
pretend  to  rule  in  God’s  name ;  he  will  destroy  wonderfully 
even  the  mighty  of  the  world  and  the  holy  people;  he  will  be 
very  prosperous  and  practical,  giving  a  great  impetus  to  trade. 
By  means  of  his  prosperity  he  will  become  proud  and  strong, 
and  will  destroy  many.  He  will  actually  stand  up  in  place  of 
Jesus — Prince  of  princes.  But  finally  he  will  be  broken  with¬ 
out  a  hand.  Thus,  you  see,  Daniel  gives  us  twelve  special 
features  of  his  person  and  reign.  Without  doubt  the  mate  of 
these  descriptions  will  be  found  on  the  person  of  Mohammed, 
and  his  successors  in  religion  Mohammedanism,  and  in  people 
and  country  the  Turks  and  Turkey  . 

Mohammed  had  his  religion  and  himself  recognised  about 
the  year  622  at  Mecca.  From  that  time  and  place  he  went 
forth  to  waste  and  to  destroy.  As  his  religion  prevailed,  so  he 
subdued  the  country  or  territory.  He  united  in  himself  the 
rights  and  prerogatives  of  king,  priest,  and  prophet,  making  it 
obligatory  upon  his  followers  to  prepare  a  way  and  enforce  his 
religion  by  the  sword.  He  was  indeed  a  king  of  fierce  counte¬ 
nance.  Thus  sprang  Mohammedanism  and  the  Turkish  nation 
into  existence.  As  a  people  they  are  chiefly  the  descendants  of 
Esau  and  Ishmael.  If  one  desires  to  know  the  history  and  final 
destiny  of  this  people,  let  him  study  the  prophetic  utterances 
concerning  Esau  and  Ishmael.  They  are  the  descendants  of 
Abraham,  and  so  they  very  naturally  fall  into  the  prophetic 
line. 

The  Hungarians  came  from  this  family  through  Lot.  The 
Poles  and  Magyars  are  from  Moab  and  Ammon.  These  things 
being  so,  it  is  no  wonder  the  Hungarians  and  Turks  should 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY 


51 


sympathise,  nor  that  England  should  have  a  liking  for  Turks, 
England  being  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes  of  Israel.  Alliance  and 
sympathy  between  England  and  Turkey  has  a  deeper  root  and 
meaning  than  some  are  willing  to  admit.  Turkey,  however,  as 
a  distinct  empire,  is  nearly  at  an  end.  The  recognition  of  the 
Ten  Lost  Tribes,  and  their  restoration  with  the  Jews  to  I  ales- 
tine,  is  connected  with  the  downfall  of  Turkey.  Saviours  are 
to  come  up  on  Mount  Zion  to  judge  the  Mount  of  Esau,  and 
the  kingdom  shall  be  the  Lord’s”  (Obad.).  a 

How  clearly  speaks  Obadiah,  again,  when  he  says,  How 
are  the  things  of  Esau  searched  out?  how  are  his  hidden  things 
sought  up?  All  the  men  of  thy  confederacy  have  brought  thee 
even  to  the  border ;  the  men  that  were  at  peace  with  thee  have 
deceived  thee,  and  prevailed  against  thee ;  they  that  eat  t  y 
bread  have  laid  a  wound  under  thee ;  there  is  none  understand¬ 
ing  in  him.  Shall  I  not  in  that  day,  saith  the  Lord,  even  destroy 
the  wise  men  out  of  Edom,  and  understanding  out  of  the 

Mount  of  Esau?”  . 

These  are  the  latter  times  of  the  king  of  fierce  countenance. 

Hear  Daniel  inquiring  of  the  angel  in  this  vision,  How  long 
shall  be  the  vision  concerning  the  daily  sacrifice  and  the  tran 
gression  of  desolation,  to  give  both  the  sanctuary  and  the  host 
to  be  trodden  under  foot?  And  he  said  unto  me,  Unto  two 
thousand  and  three  hundred  days.”  These  days  are  generally 
allowed  to  stand  for  years.  If  so,  Jerusalem  was  dest  '  y 
70  a  d  The  time  Daniel  saw  this  vision  was  about  490  b.c. 
Take  TO  tom  this  leaves  420.  From  2,300  take  420,  and  we 
have  1  880.  “Then  shall  the  sanctuary  be  cleansed.  What 
means  this?  It  means  that  Jerusalem  will  recur  back  again 

into  the  hands  of  the  Jews  and  Israel.  C,hrlst  ,Sf)ld15a^v 
Tews  “should  fall  by  the  edge  of  the  sword,  and  be  led  away 

captiveinto  altoations ;  andVusalem  shall  be  trodden  down 

Of  the  Gentiles,  until  the  times  of  the  Gentiles  be  fulfilled 

(LNowXwe  know  the  Jews  did  fall  by  the  sword  when  the 
Romans  took  Jerusalem.  Second,  we  know  they  were  scat 
te?S  among  the  nations.  Third,  Jerusalem  has  been  trodden 
under  foot-so  much  so,  that  Christians  have  not  been 

permitted  to  stand  on  Mount  Zion,  where 
Mosnue  of  Omar.  And  this  is  the  city  of  the  Great  is-i  g. 
Th?sqis  Mount  Zion,  from  which  is  yet  to  go  forth  the  law. 
This  is  Terusalem  that  God  promises  to  yet  again  make  the 
chief  place  of  the  earth.  “Arise,  shine  for  thy  light  is^otne. 
and  the  glory  of  the  Lord  is  risen  upon  thee.  When,  we  as  , 
will  the  fulness  of  the  Gentiles  come  in?  We -  answer,  Soon 
Think  of  what  God  has  taught  us  in  His  Word.  We,  as  the 
Lost  Tribes  have  indeed  been  ignorant  of  our  origin  a 
destinv  “For  I  would  not,  brethren,  that  ye  should  be 
ignorant  of  this  mystery,  lest  ye  d» iuld  be 
conceits,  that  blindness  in  part  is  happened  to  Israel,  until 
fulness  of  the  Gentiles  be  come  in"  (Rom.  xi.  2,).  This  time 


52 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


is  nicely  pointed  out  by  John  in  Rev.  xi.  2 :  “But  the  court 
which  is  without  the  temple  leave  out,  and  measure  it  not ;  for 
it  is  given  unto  the  Gentiles,  and  the  holy  city  shall  they  tread 
under  foot  forty  and  two  months ;”  or,  as  explained  in  the 
following  verse,  a  thousand  two  hundred  and  three-score  days. 
Accepting  a  day  for  a  year  again,  and  we  have  1260  years. 
Taking  Mohammed  power  to  date  from  622,  or  about,  then  622 
and  1,260  make  1,882.  Now  just  as  sure  as  Jerusalem  is  now 
trodden  under  foot,  as  certainly  will  it  be  free. 

“Awake,  awake ;  put  on  thy  strength,  O  Zion ;  put  on  thy 
beautiful  garments,  O  Jerusalem,  the  holy  city;  for  henceforth 
there  shall  no  more  come  into  thee  the  uncircumcised  and  the 
unclean.  Shake  thyself  from  the  dust;  arise  and  sit  down,  O 
Jerusalem;  loose  thyself  from  the  bands  of  thy  neck,  O  captive 
daughter  of  Zion”  (Isa.  lii.  1,  2). 

“For  Zion’s  sake  will  I  not  hold  My  peace,  and  for  Jerusa¬ 
lem’s  sake  I  will  not  rest,  until  the  righteousness  thereof  go 
forth  as  brightness,  and  the  salvation  thereof  as  a  lamp  that 
burneth ;  and  the  Gentiles  shall  see  thy  righteousness,  and  all 
kings  thy  glory.”  It  is  the  duty  of  the  watchmen  of  Zion  to 
discern  the  signs  of  the  times  and  become  obedient  unto 
heavenly  instruction.  “Ye  that  make  mention  of  the  Lord, 
keep  not  silence,  and  give  Him  no  rest  till  He  establish,  and  till 
He  make  Jerusalem  a  praise  in  the  earth”  (Isa.  lxii.  1,  2,  6,  7). 


Discourse  IX. — Little  Horn  and  Anti-Christ. 

Prophetic  Wonders — Twenty  Marks  of  the  Monster — Anti- 
Christs  Many — Mistakes  by  Writers. 

“I  considered  the  horns,  and  behold!  there  came  up  among  them 
another  little  horn,  before  whom  there  were  three  of  the  first  horns 
plucked  up  by  the  roots;  and  behold!  in  this  horn  were  eyes  like  the 
eyes  of  man,  and  a  mouth  speaking  great  things.” — Daniel  vii.  8. 

In  the  visions  and  dream  recorded  by  Daniel  in  this  chapter  we 
have  the  same  subject  matter  as  that  contained  in  the  dream  of 
Nebuchadnezzar  of  the  metallic  image.  In  this  the  subject  is 
carried  further  into  the  future,  bringing  to  view  some  new 
items  of  interest,  under  different  symbols  and  more  of  detail. 
The  four  kingdoms  of  the  metallic  image  are  in  this  dream  pre¬ 
sented  by  the  symbolism  of  four  beasts.  Babylon  by  a  lion 
which  had  eagle’s  wings,  setting  forth  the  strength  and  swift¬ 
ness  of  the  same.  Persia  by  a  bear  raised  up  on  one  side. 
Persia  at  this  time  was  composed  of  Media  as  well,  but  the 
one-sided  position  of  the  bear  denotes  the  dying  out  of  Media 
and  the  continuance  of  Persia.  The  same  idea  is  conveyed  in  the 
eighth  chapter  and  third  verse :  “The  ram  had  two  horns,  and 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY 


53 


one  was  higher  than  the  other,  and  the  higher  came  up  last.” 
Media  was  a  kingdom  before  Persia,  but  Persia  was  to  survive 
Media;  all  this  history  confirms.  After  the  Medo-Persian  Em¬ 
pire  declined,  Persia  surviving,  held  on  to  Babylon,  Lydia,  and 
Egypt — that  is,  when  the  bear  was  raised  up  on  one  side,  it 
held  in  its  mouth  three  ribs,  and  was  strong  for  a  time. 

The  Macedonian  Empire  Daniel  saw  under  the  type  of  a 
leopard,  vvhich  had  on  its  back  four  wings  of  a  fowl ;  the  beast 
also  had  four  heads.  Babylon  was  represented  by  two  wings, 
but  it  is  very  fitting  that  Alexander  and  his  empire  should  have 
four  wings,  for  no  conqueror  ever  flew  so  fast  over  the  earth  as 
this  same  monarch.  In  the  metallic  image  he  is  represented  by 
brass,  in  this  by  a  leopard,  and  in  the  one  we  noticed  in  Dis¬ 
course  VII.,  by  the  goat.  How  wonderfully  appropriate  are 
these  symbolisms,  dhe  four  heads  of  this  leopard  stand  for 
the  four  kingdoms  into  whch  the  Macedonian  Empire  was  di¬ 
vided  on  the  death  of  Alexander— namely,  first,  Egypt  under 
Ptolemy;  second,  Syria  under  Antigonus;  third,  Asia  Minor 
under  Lysimachus ;  fourth,  Greece  under  Cassander.  d  hese 
four  were  the  four  leading  generals  of  Alexander. 

The  fourth  beast  of  this  vision  is  a  nondescript ;  for  among 
all  the  animal  creation  there  could  not  be  found  one  that  could 
suitably  represent  Rome.  But  one  was  made  for  the  puipose, 
combining  in  itself  all  that  is  fierce  and  terrible.  “And  behold 
a  fourth  beast,  dreadful  and  terrible,  and  strong  exceedingly ; 
and  it  had  great  iron  teeth;  it  devoured  and  brake  in  pieces, 
and  stamped  the  residue  with  the  feet  of  it:  and  it  was  diverse 
from  all  the  beasts  that  were  before  it ;  and  it  had  ten  horns. 
Its  teeth  were  of  iron  and  its  claws  of  brass. .  What  a  monster . 
The  other  beasts  faithfully  represented  their  respective  king¬ 
doms,  and  so  did  this.  What  a  record!  What  a  counterpart 
we  have  in  history  of  this  beast !  “Tell  it  not  in  Gath,  publish 
it  not  in  the  streets  of  Askelon,”  lest  the  Pagan  rejoice,  and  the 
heathen  mock  at  us,  and  the  infidel  triumph  over  us.  Blot  out 
from  Time’s  record  the  24th  of  August,  1572.  Let  not  our 
children  learn  the  name  of  St.  Bartholomew,  for  fear  they 
should  despise  Christianity.  Quench  the_ flames  ol  Smithfield, 
destroy  the  Inquisition,  and  divorce  Christianity  from  such  a 
kingdom,  from  such  a  beast.  Thank  Heaven !  the  beast  is 
dying ;  its  teeth  are  worn  to  the  very  gum  by  the  gnawings  of 
centuries ;  its  claws  are  not  now  sharp,  so  it  cannot  now  crush 
the  innocent,  as  in  days  gone  by,  nor  tear  with  its  brass  claw  the 
weak.  Though  the  beast  is  growing  old  and  weaker,  yet  let  us 
remember  that  its  death  struggle  is  yet  to  come.  The  beast  has 
been  wounded,  but  this  shall  only  serve  to  intensify  its  rage. 
To  be  forewarned  is  to  be  forearmed,  if  we  are  wise. 

This  beast,  Daniel  tells  us,  had  ten  horns,  and  these  horns 
are  ten  kings—  that  is,  kingdoms— that  shall  rise.  Just  here 
we  may  reasonably  ask  whether  these  ten  kingdoms  are  yet  in 
existence,  and  the  answer  is,  No.  Some  of  them  may  be,  of 
course  they  are  in  existence,  as  was  General  Grant  before  the 


54 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


war,  but  not  yet  distinct  or  assigned  their  special  work  and 
place.  The  time,  however,  for  them  all  to  appear  is  near  at 
hand.  Of  this  we  may  rest  satisfied,  when  once  they  are  all  in 
existence  we  will  have  no  difficulty  in  knowing  them.  Prophecy 
unfulfilled  is  always  more  difficult  to  interpret  than  when  it  is 
fulfilling  or  fulfilled.  We  have  no  doubt  but  some  of  these 
horns  are  in  existence,  and  from  what  we  can  glean  from  pro¬ 
phecy  and  history,  some  are  not  yet  in  their  proper  place. 

The  special  province  of  prophecy  is  to  prepare  us  for  what  is 
coming.  Searching  into  prophecy  enables  us  to  forecast  the 
future  with  tolerable  certainty,  just  as  the  scientist  can  toler¬ 
ably  forecast  the  weather  by  studying  the  laws,  forces,  and 
inclinations  of  nature.  So  the  Christian  student,  by  studying 
prophecy,  Providence,  and  history,  and  comparing  them,  can 
know  much  of  what  is  coming.  On  the  Divine  side  all  pro¬ 
phecy  is  certain,  but  on  the  human  it  can  only  be  approximated. 
Prophecy  furnishes  the  strongest  kind  of  evidence  in  favour  of 
the  existence  of  God — inspiration  of  the  Scriptures  and  Provi¬ 
dence.  The  Lord  Himself  calls  our  attention  to  this  kind  of 
evidence  frequently  in  the  Bible.  “Produce  your  cause,  saith 
the  Lord ;  bring  forth  your  strong  reasons,  saith  the  King  of 
Jacob.  Let  them  bring  them  forth  and  show  us  what  will  hap¬ 
pen  ;  let  them  show  the  former  things  what  they  be,  that  we 
may  consider  them,  and  know  the  latter  end  of  them;  or  de¬ 
clare  us  things  for  to  come”  (Isa.  xli.  21,  22). 

Prophecy  does  not  interfere  with  the  coming  to  pass  of  an 
event,  or  suppress  man’s  freedom  any  more  than  the  man  at 
Washington,  who  gives  us  the  weather  probabilities,  makes  the 
weather  or  regulates  nature.  Even  when  men  know  the  se¬ 
quence  of  a  thing  they  oftentimes  persist  in  doing  it.  The 
soldiers  who  wrangled  at  the  cross  about  the  dividing  of  the 
garments  of  the  crucified  One,  thought  little  and  cared  less  for 
prophecy;  but  when  they  came  to  the  Saviour’s  vest,  they  fell 
into  the  line  of  prophecy,  for  at  once  they  cast  lots  for  that,  all 
of  which  had  been  forewritten  for  hundreds  of  years.  Run 
and  tell  that  young  man  that  the  place  he  is  entering  is  the  way 
of  death.  Tell  him  that  the  air  is  foul,  that  the  furniture  and 
painted  humanity  are  all  gotten  up  to  deceive.  Tell  him  that 
in  a  few  years  he  will  repent  ever  having  seen  such  a  place. 
And  what  is  your  reward?  It  is  that  you  are  laughed  at  and 
esteemed  as  one  that  interferes,  and  told  to  mind  your  own 
business.  The  young  man  is  free  and  self-confident.  Look  in 
a  few  years  for  the  same  young  man  and  you  shall  find  him  a 
terrible  example  of  fulfilled  prophecy.  Diseased,  worn,  weak, 
and  weary,  he  cries  in  the  anguish  of  soul  for  his  folly.  “And 
thou  mourn  at  the  last,  when  thy  flesh  and  thy  body  are  con¬ 
sumed,  and  say,  How  have  I  hated  instruction  and  my  heart 
despised  reproof!”  (Prov.  v.  11,  12). 

Palestine  may  yet  come  into  the  hands  of  England,  and 
be  opened  up  for  the  return  of  the  Jews,  who,  when  the  time 
comes,  will  go  in  multitudes,  and  the  Lost  Tribes  representa- 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY 


55 


tively.  “I  will  take  you  one  of  a  city,  and  two  of  a  family, 
and  I  will  bring  you  to  Zion”  (Jer.  iii.  14).  In  a  few  years 
men  will  understand  why,  in  this  country,  as  well  as  in  Eng¬ 
land,  people  are  hunting  up  their  genealogy,  and  by  tradition, 
history,  and  heraldry,  trying  to  ascertain  of  what  family  they 
are.  The  re-settlement  of  Palestine  by  God’s  chosen  people, 
the  Lost  Tribes,  is  foretold  in  the  Bible.  Hanging  upon  the 
fulfilment  of  this  great  fact  are  many  other  prophecies  and 
events,  which  are  of  great  interest  to  the  Church  and  the  world. 

1st.  The  ten-toed  kingdom  must  be  formed.  These  kings 
are  to  form  an  alliance  with  the  beast,  or  Church  of  Rome,  as 
representative  of  this  beast.  “And  the  ten  horns  which  thou 
sawest  are  ten  kings,  which  have  received  no  kingdom  as  yet, 
but  receive  power  as  kings  one  hour  with  the  beast.  These  have 
one  mind,  and  shall  give  their  power  and  strength  unto  the 
beast”  (Rev.  xvii.  12).  Thus  strengthened,  the  beast  will  make 
war  with  the  saints,  or  chosen,  but  it  will  be  her  final  struggle, 
for  in  struggling  she  will  die.  These  ten  kings  will  forsake 
her. 

2nd.  Anti-Christ  has  to  appear  after  the  settlement  of 
Palestine.  Anti-Christ  is  represented  by  the  other  little  horn 
spoken  of  in  the  text.  This  little  horn  is  to  come  forth  irom 
one  of  the  ten  horns.  He,  too,  will  ally  with  the  beast.  The 
subject  of  anti-Christ  is  a  very  interesting  one;  on  it,  men  have 
written  and  speculated  much  and  wildly.  In  studying  a  subject 
of  this  kind,  we  should  first  ascertain  the  Scripture  teachings 
on  it,  then  look  for  the  preparative  signs  in  the  Church  and 
world,  and  finally,  for  the  counterpart,  which,  once  in  exist¬ 
ence,  no  one  can  fail  to  recognise.  In  the  Scriptures  he  goes  by 
the  names  of  Lucifer,  man  of  sin,  son  of  perdition,  and  that 
wicked  one.  Now  all  these  names  are  indicative  of  some 
special  feature  of  his  character.  Man  of  sin  points  out  the  in¬ 
tensity  of  the  person  in  wickedness.  Let  us  consider  the  char¬ 
acter  of  anti-Christ.  . 

From  the  Scriptures  we  find  that  he  will  be  characterised  by 
some  twenty  peculiarities.  These  we  will  just  enumerate: 
a  cunning  seducer,  a  vile  imposter,  a  bold  blasphemer,  a  great 
tyrant,  a  wonderful  organizer  and  diplomatist;  hence  he  will 
readily  make  alliances  with  other  kings  and  strengthen  him- 
self ;  a  pretentious  and  hypocritical  Communist,  dividing  his 
lands,  money,  and  treasure  among  the  people ;  he  will  be  very 
ambitious  and  aspiring,  doing  or  being  anything  so  he  may 
gain  his  point;  he  will  be  very  self-willed;  he  will  be  very 
boastful,  speaking  great  words ;  he  will  be  very  cruel,  not  heed¬ 
ing  the  plea  of  woman ;  he  will  be  very  sacrilegious,  sitting  in 
the  temple  of  God — that  is,  the  new  temple,  built  by  the  re¬ 
turned  Jews,  and  actually  claim  to  be  God ;  he  will  be  a  scien¬ 
tific  spiritualist,  able  to  work  miracles,  even  to  bring  fire  down 
from  the  clouds ;  he  will  be  very  powerful  by  his  alliance,  ap¬ 
parent  generosity,  and  scientific  deception;  he  will  be  a  great 
liar,  making  treaties  and  breaking  them  whenever  it  suits  him ; 


56 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


lie  will  be  very  wicked,  guilty  of  all  manner  of  crime ;  his  reign 
will  be  short  as  a  king,  only  about  three  and  a-half  years.  Be¬ 
fore  this  he  will  have  been  a  man  of  power  and  position.  He 
will  suddenly  be  destroyed  in  the  time  of  a  fearful  uprising 
of  the  people. 

Against  this  person  our  Saviour  warned  the  Jews  and  all  the 
Church,  but  especially  the  Jews,  and  He  did  so  for  special 
reasons,  which  will  appear  hereafter  in  this  discourse.  Christ 
said,  “I  am  come  in  My  Father’s  name,  and  ye  receive  Me  not; 
if  another  shall  come  in  his  own  name,  him  ye  will  receive.” 
At  the  time  of  anti-Christ’s  death  there  will  be  raging  a  fearful 
war,  and  coincident  with  this  war  there  will  be  another  Saint 
Bartholomew  massacre  in  several  of  the  ten-toed  kingdoms. 
The  beast  and  anti-Christ  are  to  be  destroyed  about  the  same 
time.  It  will  be  the  last  plot  of  the  Jesuits.  It  may  be  that  a 
glimpse  of  that  time  the  Saviour  intended  to  show  to  His 
disciples,  when  He  said :  “For  then  shall  be  great  tribulation, 
such  as  was  not  since  the  beginning  of  the  world,  to  this  time, 
no,  nor  ever  shall  be ;  and  except  those  days  should  be  short¬ 
ened,  there  should  no  flesh  be  saved ;  but  for  the  elect’s  sake 
those  days  shall  be  shortened.  Then,  if  any  man  shall  say 
unto  you,  Lo !  here  is  Christ,  or  there,  believe  it  not ;  for  there 
shall  arise  false  Christs,  and  false  prophets,  and  shall  show 
great  signs  and  wonders,  insomuch  that  if  it  were  possible,  they 
shall  deceive  the  very  elect.  Behold !  I  have  told  you  before” 
(Matt.  xxiv.  21 — 25). 


Discourse  X. — Battle  of  Armageddon. 

The  Combatants  on  Both  Sides — Who  “the  Kings  of  the  East” 
are — The  Great  Napoleonic  Idea — Disraeli,  Lincoln,  and 
Grant — England’s  Policy  in  Turkey — Future  Wars  and 
Intrigues — The  Great  Battlefield-Gathering  of  the  Na¬ 
tions — Earthquakes— Jerusalem  a  Seaport. 

“And  He  gathered  them  together  into  a  place  called  in  the 
Hebrew  tongue  Armageddon.” — Rev.  xvi.  16. 

Christian  students  and  prophetic  writers  are  generally  agreed 
on  three  things  touching  this  great  event.  First,  that  there 
is  to  be  such  a  decisive  battle  fought.  Second,  that  it  will 
take  place  in  some  part  of  Palestine.  Third,  that  this  great 
struggle  will  be  final,  the  end  of  war,  the  beginning  of  the 
Millennium  morn. 

In  the  Scriptures  the  contestants  are  pointed  out,  as  they 
rally  under  the  standards  of  the  dragon,  the  beast,  and  anti- 
Christ  on  one  side,  and  on  the  other,  under  the  standard  of 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDLON 


57 


David,  will  be  the  called,  the  chosen,  and  the  faithful;  or,  in 
other  words,  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes  as  found  chiefly  in  the  Saxon 
race,  with  all  who  sincerely  believe  on  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ. 

In  another  sermon  we  pointed  out  to  you  the  plain  fact  of 
the  existence  of  David’s  throne  and  David’s  seed  as  found  and 
seen  specially  in  the  throne  of  England.  We  mere  see  how 
faithfully  God  has  kept  His  promise  to  David  and  His  people. 
For  God  frequently  told  David  that  His  throne  should  be 
established  unto  all  generations,  and  of  David’s  seed  there 
should  never  be  wanting  a  man  to  sit  thereon.  It  is  the  per¬ 
manence,  the  grandeur,  and  progressive  character  of  this 
throne  and  people  that  make  it  a  fitting  type  of  Christ  and  His 
Church.  Nay,  more,  it  is  on  this  throne  that  Christ  now  sits, 
so  far  as  this  world  goes ;  and  it  is  through  this  people  that 
He  reigns,  and  He  will  and  must  reign  until  He  has  conquered 
a  universal  peace.  It  is  a  delusion  too  long  entertained  by  the 
Church  to  think  that  David’s  throne  and  seed  have  not  now, 
nor  for  centuries  had,  an  existence.  It  is  a  delusion  that  we 
should  not  be  able  for  a  moment  to  think  that  the  Ten  Tribes 
of  Israel  are  lost  for  ever,  or  that  their  work  or  mission  is  ful¬ 
filled.  As  surely  as  the  Two  Tribes,  Judah  and  Levi,  now 
exist,  fulfilling  and  filling  in  the  outlines  of  prophetic  history,  so 
surely  are  Reuben,  Simeon,  Zebulun,  Issachar,  Dan,  Gad, 
Asher,  Naphtali,  Benjamin,  Ephraim,  and  Manasseh  in  exist¬ 
ence,  answering  the  purpose  of  an  all-seeing  Providence. 

Who  are  the  kings  of  the  East  spoken  of  in  the  Scriptures? 
We  answer,  They  are  the  royal  ones  of  the  House  of  David. 
The  word  king,  both  in  Hebrew  and  Greek,  means  such.  This 
seed  God  chose,  and  made  them  royal  by  that  very  selection. 
They  have  been  away  from  their  own  land,  Palestine,  wander¬ 
ing  and  dwelling  in  the  West.  But  God  in  Providence  is  pre¬ 
paring  a  way  for  their  return.  In  connection  with  the  pouring 
out  of  the  sixth  vial  upon  the  great  river  of  the  Euphrates,  or 
upon  Turkey,  as  most  writers  agree,  the  waters  are  to  dry  up 
— that  is,  Turkey  is  to  decay,  to  be  absorbed.  And  why?  “That 
the  way  of  the  kings  of  the  East  might  be  prepared”  (Rev. 
xvi.  12). 

These  kings  have  been  away  from  the  East,  and  their  return 
is  assured,  and  the  preparation  for  such  return  is  to  be  seen 
at  this  time,  and  in  connection  with  the  decay  of  Turkey.  If 
Turkey,  as  symbolised  by  the  river  Euphrates,  is  drying  up, 
then  these  kings  must  be  advancing  Eastward ;  and  so  they  are. 

The  crownless  king,  Disraeli,*  who,  like  many  other  men 
God  has  raised  up,  is  for  these  times  an  index  finger  pointing 
out  the  way  of  Providence.  He  is  a  receptive  agent  of  Divine 
force,  to  the  intent  that  he  may  interpret  a  Divine  purpose. 
He  may  know,  or  he  may  not  know,  that  he  is  so  directed  of 

“The  reader  is  reminded  that  most  of  these  discourses  were 
delivered  forty  years  ago,  hence  the  references  to  Queen  Victoria, 
Lord  Beaconsfield,  and  the  Berlin  Congress  in  this  and  other  dis¬ 
courses.  Many  of  Dr.  Wild’s  statements  may  now  be  read  and 
studied  in  the  light  of  history. 


58 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


Heaven.  The  prophets  of  old  were  seldom  permitted  to  in¬ 
terpret  or  understand  their  own  prophecies.  If  they  asked, 
like  Daniel,  the  meaning,  they  were  told  to  “go  their  way,” 
for  oftentimes  the  words  were  “closed  up  and  sealed  until  the 
time  of  the  end.”  No  wonder  this  man,  against  all  England 
nearly,  and  to  the  amazement  of  all  the  world,  proclaims  the 
Queen  of  England  the  Empress  of  India,  for  the  way  of  the 
kings  of  the  East  must  be  prepared. 

Napoleon  Bonaparte’s  grand  idea  was  to  prepare  the  way 
of  the  kings  of  the  East  and  make  himself  and  his  descendants 
these  kings.  “Conquer  England  and  the  world  is  ours,”  he 
said.  But  when  his  secret  and  well-prepared  assault  on  England 
was  revealed  and  frustrated  by  a  train  of  providential  events, 
he  hit  upon  another  plan  to  get  possession  of  Palestine.  Many 
years  ago  he  invited  all  the  leading  Jews  of  the  world  to  a 
secret  council  in  Paris ;  he  wished  them  to  aid  him  in  getting 
possession  of  Palestine.  He  pretended  to  want  their  return. 
He  gave  them  certain  privileges  and  laboured  to  procure 
more  from  the  other  nations;  he  did  much  for  the  Jews  in 
enlarging  their  liberties  and  taking  away  from  them  the  curse 
of  society.  The  one  idea  that  is  distinctly  Napoleonic  is  to 
possess  Palestine.  The  late  Napoleon  had  his  idea,  and  in  his 
day  this  idea  had  become  a  part  of  France;  so  much  so,  that 
France  thought  herself  to  be  then  and  now  the  real  protector 
of  Palestine.  It  was  for  this  idea  that  she  allied  with  England 
and  Turkey  in  the  Crimean  war.  It  was  to  keep  Russia  back 
from  possessing  the  holy  places.  Not  till  France  was  weak¬ 
ened  could  England  advance  on  her  way  East  rapidly ;  so 
Germany  was  used  to  destroy  her  prestige  and  cause  her  to 
stand  aside  till  England  proceeds  on  her  way  homeward. 

It  was  a  comely  sight,  some  few  years  ago,  to  see  two  Jews 
closeted  together  making  a  secret  bargain — one  had  power,  the 
other  had  money.  The  man  of  power  asked  the  man  of  money 
to  lend  him  twenty  million  dollars ;  it  was  done.  At  once  the 
man  of  power  purchases  with  this  twenty  millions  part  of  his 
fatherland  back  again — the  Suez  Canal.  This  very  canal  is  on 
the  boundary  of  the  land  of  Palestine  as  given  to  Abraham 
centuries  ago.  By  this  very  route  the  old  patriarch  entered  the 
Promised  Land.  It  was  fitting,  indeed,  that  this  should  be  the 
first  piece  purchased  back.  No  one  knew  save  those  directly 
interested.  England  murmured  and  France  protested,  but  the 
thing  was  done.  Poor  France,  bleeding  and  divided,  could  do 
but  little ;  for  Disraeli  and  Rothschild  had  done  the  work.  The 
way  of  the  kings  of  the  East  must  be  prepared.  So  on  they 
go.  A  man  who  executes  a  Divine  purpose  is  always  strong. 
Abraham  Lincoln,  in  the  history  of  our  country,  was  so  chosen 
and  led  of  God.  The  politicians,  and  statesmen,  and  generals, 
and  many  of  the  people  were  against  him  at  first;  but  the  Lord 
was  with  him,  so  he  marched  on  to  victory,  the  country  follow¬ 
ing  in  the  wake.  And  though  dead,  not  forgotten,  the  country 
and  the  civilised  world  are  marching  on  after  him,  and  now 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDLON 


59 


they  have  nearly  overtaken  him.  Lincoln’s  idea  and  this 
country’s  are  nearly  equal.  A  man  led  of  God  is  generally  a 
good  distance  behind,  and  the  people  led  by  such  a  man  are 
equally  as  far  behind  him  as  he  is  behind  God.  But  this  nation 
and  Abraham  Lincoln  are  now  one,  and  in  those  things  in 
which  they  once  were  divided  they  are  a  unit,  with  more  than 
the  honoured  Lincoln ;  for  they  are  a  unit  with  God  and  provi¬ 
dence.  Thus  follows  the  English  nation  in  the  wake  of  Dis¬ 
raeli,  and  the  world  is  coming  on  behind,  and  the  day  will  come 
when  all  will  be  a  unit.  It  does  not  shock  our  idea  of  human 
honesty  much  when  we  learn  that  this  crownless  king  played  a 
double  game  with  Russia  and  Turkey.  It  is  intensely  Jewish, 
but  if  it  were  only  Jewish,  then  it  would  be  very  detestaole ; 
it  is  more,  it  is  Divine  in  part.  “Had  the  princes  of  this  world 
known  they  would  not  have  crucified  the  Prince  of. Glory. 
Had  the  princes  of  the  late  Berlin  Congress  known  the  double 
game  being  played  by  one  of  the  quietest  of  their  number,  they 
would  not  have  done  as  they  did.  Turkey  in  Asia  was  given 
over  to  England’s  protection.  The  island  of  Cyprus  was  given 
over  to  England — surely  the  way  of  the  kings  of  the  East  is 
being  gradually  prepared. 

Why  did  not  the  Congress  hand  over  to  England  s  protection 
Turkey  in  Europe?  For  reasons  good  and  sufficient.  Turkey 
in  Europe  will  be  the  cause  of  much  strife,  of  several  wars,  and 
of  strange  alliances ;  hence  it  would  not  have  done  for  Israel- 
England  to  be  mixed  up  with  it.  Israel  is  to  be  much  pre¬ 
served  from  war,  until  the  great  battle  of  Armageddon  comes 
on.  Against  that  time  she  will  have  to  husband  her  strength 
and  resources.  It  is  marvellous  now  to  think  that  what  the 
Congress  settled  as  belonging  to  England,  none  dispute  all  is 
peace  But  Russia’s  share  and  Austria  s  are  in  arms  Servia, 
Greece,  Roumania,  and  all  theTurkish  provinces  rebel  and  are 
in  a  state  of  disquietude,  that  portends  war  and  strife  again  m 
a  few  years.  But  England  will  have,  nothing  to  do  with  it, 
excepting  that  Russia  and  Austria,  with  the  consent  of  Ger¬ 
many  Italy,  and  France,  are  to  set  a  precedent  for  England, 
which  in  alew  years  she  will  need.  Thus  gradually  will  Israel- 
Encdand  open  up  Palestine  for  Christian  settlement.  The 
Mohammedans  will  murmur  and  resist  to  have  the ,  holy  places 

takCn  "JS  it^  It  is  TuTet £d  England 

3  dispute,  and  in  each  dispute  England  will  find  a  reason  lor 

^’The’foirtest'antsIiJo^sfdeTIlTgreat  battle  of  Armaged- 
don  you  remember,  are  the  dragon,  the  beast  and  anti-Chnst 
Now  what  people  are  represented  by  the  term  dragon?  We 
Now  WllCn  nations  and  authorities,  just  as  the  Chinese 

•ssjiSa 


60 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


these  different  worshippers  and  religions;  but  the  time  will 
come  when  she  will  no  longer  tolerate  the  same ;  thus  will  they 
arraign  themselves  against  her  in  the  battle  of  Armageddon. 
1  his  will  come  to  pass  as  the  gradual  destruction  of  Mormon- 
ism  in  our  country.  This  system  has  been  fortified  by  law; 
now  laws  are  being  arraigned  against  it.  It  is  now  only  tol¬ 
erated,  and  in  time  it  will  be  wiped  out  of  existence. 

The  final  battle  referred  to  in  the  text  is  to  occur  at  a  place 
called  in  the  Hebrew  tongue  Armageddon,  the  literal  meaning 
of  which  is  at  the  Mount  of  Megiddo.  In  olden  times  there 
was  a  city  called  Megiddo ;  it  stood  in  what  is  now  called  the 
great  plain  of  Esdraelon — a  plain  that  lies  midway  between  the 
Sea  of  Galilee  and  the  Mediterranean.  It  was  also  called  Jez- 
reel.  The  prophet  Hosea  speaks  of  this  place,  battle,  and 
time,  all  by  this  one  word.  Referring  to  the  time  when  the 
children  of  Judah  and  of  Israel  are  gathered  together  under 
one  head  in  their  own  land,  he  says,  “For  great  shall  be  the  day 
of  Jezreel”  (Hos.  i.  11).  It  is  spoken  of  in  the  Scriptures  and 
history  as  the  valley  of  Jehoshaphat,  because  here  Jehoshaphat, 
the  King  of  Judah,  gained  a  great  victory;  for  here  the  Lord 
fought  against  the  enemies  of  Israel,  as  He  will  in  the  coming 
battle.  Joel  iii.  12  says,  referring  to  this  coming  struggle,  “Let 
the  heathen  be  waked  up  and  come  to  the  valley  of  Jehoshaphat : 
for  there  will  I  sit  to  judge  all  the  heathen  round  about.” 

There  is  one  name  given  to  this  time  and  battle  that  is  very 
significant  and  striking.  Have  you  ever  noticed  it?  If  not, 
let  me  call  your  attention  to  it.  It  is  called  “That  great  day 
of  God  Almighty,”  by  John  in  the  chapter  of  the  text.  The 
day  of  the  Lord  of  hosts  by  Isaiah.  Ezek.  xxx.  3 :  “Howl  ye ! 
Woe  worth  the  day !  For  the  day  of  the  Lord  is  near :  it  shall 
be  the  time  of  the  heathen.”  And  Joel  says,  “Multitudes, 
multitudes,  in  the  valley  of  decision;  for  the  day  of  the  Lord 
is  near  in  the  valley  of  decision.”  By  the  prophets  Amos, 
Obadiah,  Zephaniah,  Zechariah,  Malachi,  and  apostles  Paul 
and  Peter,  it  is  called  the  day  of  the  Lord. 

You  ask  if  this  battle  may  not  have  taken  place.  We  answer, 
No.  Of  such  a  battle  we  have  no  record.  Again,  it  will  be  the 
end  of  the  war — the  final  overthrow  of  Paganism,  the  beast, 
and  anti-Christ.  Malachi  says,  “Behold,  I  will  send  you  the 
prophet  Elijah  before  the  coming  of  that  great  and  dreadful 
day  of  the  Lord.”  Elijah  has  not  yet  been  as  a  witness.  At  the 
time  of  this  great  battle  nature  is  to  take  a  wonderful  part.  As 
when  Christ  was  on  the  cross,  the  sun  darkened,  the  rocks  rent, 
the  mountains  shook,  so  in  connection  with  this  battle  there 
shall  be  some  strange  wonders — earthquakes,  thundering, 
lightning,  hail,  and  fire.  The  Mount  of  Olives  will  divide ;  the 
valley  of  the  Dead  Sea  will  fill  with  water  and  join  to  the 
Mediterranean;  Jerusalem  will  become  a  seaport,  an  appointed 
centre  from  which,  being  central  to  all  the  world,  will  go 
forth  the  ships  of  the  Lord.  The  city  of  Jerusalem,  between 
this  time  and  that,  will  be  considerably  enlarged,  then  it  will 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDLON 


61 


divide  into  three  parts.  At  the  time  of  this  dividing  John  says, 
“That  the  cities  of  the  nations  are  to  fall” — London,  Paris, 
Berlin,  Rome,  St.  Petersburg,  and  many  others — that  all  may 
turn  to  Jerusalem,  the  capitol  appointed  .of  heaven. 

If  you  wish  to  know  more  of  the  particulars  of  this  day,  read 
the  prophets,  study  what  John  the  Revelator  says  under  the 
sixth  vial  and  sixth  seal.  With  awful  grandeur  and  with  ter¬ 
rible  majesty  have  the  sacred  writers  set  forth  this  day  and 
time. 

That  this  day  will  come,  who  will  deny  ?  Look  at  the  world 
ripening  for  this  day.  Here,  in  our  own  land,  as  well  as  others, 
the  forces  are  maturing,  the  agents  are  at  work.  Many  of  the 
events  of  the  past  years  we  were  permitted  to  forecast  by  look¬ 
ing  into  the  future  through  the  prophets,  and  onward  yet  we 
look.  And  the  events  coming  are  neither  less  in  number,  merit, 
or  force,  than  those  passed.  Keep  the  events  of  prophecy  in 
their  proper  order  lest  they  confuse  you.  The  Jews  and  Ten 
Lost  Tribes  are  to  be  found  and  possess  Palestine  before  this 
battle.  Anti-Christ  is  to  appear.  The  two  witnesses,  Moses 
and  Elijah,  are  to  appear.  And  Jesus,  our  beloved  Master,  will 
not  come  till  the  world  is  settled  long  in  perpetual  peace — till 
the  house  is  prepared  for  the  bride,  then  shall  He  come.  But 
with  lightning  speed  events  are  crowding  on  along  the  ages. 
The  accumulative  forces  of  centuries  are  pressing  hard  upon 
time  present.  The  time  of  the  end  is  near — not  the  end  of 
time,  but  the  time  appointed  of  God  in  which  certain  great 
things  are  to  be  accomplished.  More  than  eighteen  hundred 
years  ago  John  cried  out,  “Loose  the  four  angels  which  are 
bound  in  the  great  river  Euphrates.,  And  the  four  angels  were 
loosed,  which  were  prepared  for  an  hour,  and  a  day,  and 
a  month,  and  a  year”  (Rev.  ix.  14). 

The  Turkish  Power  originated  on  the  banks  of  the  Euph¬ 
rates.  It  first  was  divided  into  four  Sultanates — namely,  Bag¬ 
dad,  Aleppo,  Damascus  and  Caesarea.  These  are  typified  under 
four  angels.  Their  time  was  to  be  396  years  and  a  fraction — 
an  hour,  day,  month,  and  year.  Thus,  taking  a  day  for  a  year, 
365  for  the  year,  thirty  for  the  month,  one  for  the  day,  and  we 
have  396.  So  from  the  taking  of  Bagdad  by  the  Turks  in  1057, 
which  was  the  overthrow  of  the  Saracens,  until  the  capture  of 
Constantinople  in  1453,  which  overthrew  the  Greek  Empire, 
we  have  just  396  years.  And  the  time  for  the  drying  up  of 
Turkey  is  at  hand ;  and  so  it  comes  to  pass. 

Dear  friends,  how  wonderful  are  the  dealings  of  our  God ! 
Can  we  shut  our  eyes  to  His  Divine  Revelation?  Let  us  be 
wise  in  the  day  of  grace,  taking  heed  to  the  sure  Word  of 
prophecy,  as  unto  a  light  that  shineth  in  a  dark  place.  The 
world  indeed  is  dark,  and  all  confusion.  But  His  Word  shows 
unto  us  order  in  all  this  confusion,  blessed  be  His  name. 


62 


Discourse  XI. — Wonders  of  the  Future. 

I 

Purpose  of  the  Flood — The  Abrahamic  Covenant — Rending 
Mount  Olivet — Former  Earthquakes — Boundaries  of 
Palestine — Dan  and  Gad  to  Guard  the  “Gates” — Gad  the 
Scotchman — The  Future  Jerusalem — the  Dead  Sea  and 
Mediterranean  to  be  Joined — Mistake  of  Spiritualising 
Everything. 

“And  His  feet  shall  stand  in  that  day  upon  the  Mount  of  Olives, 
which  is  before  Jerusalem  on  the  East;  and  the  Mount  of  Olives 
shall  cleave  in  the  midst  thereof  toward  the  East  and  toward  the 
West  and  there  shall  be  a  very  great  valley:  and  half  the  mountain 
shall  remove  toward  the  North,  and  half  of  it  toward  the  South.” — 
Zech.  xiv.  4. 

Between  four  and  five  thousand  years  ago  the  earth  was 
washed  with  the  regenerating  waters  of  a  terrible  flood. 
Millions  were  suddenly  cut  off,  with  their  handiwork  and  ante¬ 
diluvian  civilisation.  The  swelling  floods  subsided,  and  the 
God-avenging  waters  retired  tQ_  their  appointed  place.  The 
earth  again  stood  forth  in  virgin  strength,  lonely,  bare,  and 
citiless,  but  with  a  potency  and  promise  inviting  and  grand. 
Across  these  swelling  floods  one  craft  had  been  safely  borne; 
in  it  was  stored  the  seed-stock  of  a  new  world  of  man  and 
beast.  The  destruction  had  been  complete  and  terrible.  If  we 
credit  Dr.  Gurney  and  others  who  have  written  on  this  subject, 
the  population  far  exceeded  the  inhabitants  of  to-day.  But 
whether  they  did  or  did  not,  we  know  that  many  must  have  per¬ 
ished,  and  civilisation  must  have  been  hurled  back  to  a  primi¬ 
tive  beginning.  No  doubt  the  present  seas  and  oceans  cover 
over  the  ruins  of  that  age.  Eliphaz,  the  Temanite,  when  ad¬ 
dressing  Job,  said :  “Hast  thou  marked  the  old  way,  which 
wicked  men  have  trodden,  which  were  cut  down  out  of  time, 
zuhose  foundation  was  overflown  with  a  flood f”  Now,  it  is  not 
unreasonable  to  suppose  that  in  this  and  every  other  great 
change  in  nature  God  has  a  purpose — a  design  agreeable  with 
His  own  exalted  character.  He  is  too  wise  to  err,  and  too  good  to 
be  unkind.  The  flood  came  for  the  same  reason  that  He  only 
gave  to  Adam  one  wife.  And  what  was  that  reason  ?  It  was  that 
He  might  fill  the  world  with  a  godly  seed.  “And  did  not  He 
make  one?  Yet  had  He  the  residue  of  the  Spirit.  And  where¬ 
fore  one?  That  He  might  seek  a  godly  seed”  (Mai.  ii.  15). 
The  same  Spirit  which  made  one  Eve  could  have  made  twenty, 
for  the  residue  of  the  Spirit  was  with  Him.  It  was  in  the  inter¬ 
est  of  morality  and  godliness  that  the  flood  came. 

When  this  design  began  to  fail  of  being  accomplished  by  the 
increased  wickedness  of  the  post-diluvians,  then  God  called 
Abram,  and  through  Abraham  and  his  seed  designed  that  this 


WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE 


63 


purpose  should  flow  on  and  be  fulfilled.  Through  this 
Abrahamic  channel  flow  all  the  purposes  of  a  Divine  Provi¬ 
dence  in  this  world.  Through  his  seed  all  the  nations  of  the 
earth  are  to  be  blessed.  The  children  of  Abraham  are  the 
appointed  and  Divinely  authorised  agents  of  God.  Ihrough 
them,  as  primary,  he  has,  and  is,  and  will  evangelise  the 
world.  Abraham  stands  to  the  generations  of  earth  as  the 
Gulf-stream  to  Europe  and  the  isles  of  the  sea.  This  Gulf- 
stream  is  our  largest  river;  being  the  longest,  broadest,  and 
deepest.  Its  bottom  and  banks  are  cold  water.  Compressed  by 
the  straits  of  Florida  it  rushes  forth  to  warm  and  replenish  the 
earth  and  isles  of  the  sea.  So  the  forces  of  a  Divine  Provi¬ 
dence  compressed  in  Abraham  go  forth  to  bless  mankind.  The 
Gulf-stream  is  water  in  water,  and  Abraham’s  seed  are  men 
among  men.  Providence  is  at  once  clear  and  intelligible,  and 
history  is  at  once  plain,  reasonable,  and  harmonious,  when 
interpreted  in  harmony  with  the  Abrahamic  covenant.  The 
scattering  and  returning  of  Israel  and  Judah  to  Palestine,  and 
the  intervening  history,  from  the  time  of  dispersion  to  the 
return,  is  clear  as  noon-day.  Their  location,  oppression,  pros¬ 
perity,  and  victories,  have  long  been  foretold  by  prophets  in¬ 
spired  of  God. 

Through  all  the  changes  in  nature  God  has  a  design.  He 
prepared  the  world  for  Adam  and  his  seed,  and  Pie  did  so  by 
some  wonderful  upheaving  and  overturning ;  this  scientists 
will  admit.  This  world,  in  its  present  shape  and  condition, 
indicates  fierce  and  protracted  struggles.^  The  outlines  of 
strange  and  sublime  revolutions  are  imprinted  on  her  rock- 
ribbed  bosom.  Look  at  her  cloud-capped  mountains,  her 
snow-crowned  peaks,  her  wild  and  rocky  wastes,  her  barren 
plains  and  sandy  deserts,  her  fruitful  hills  and  luxuriant  val¬ 
leys,  her  mighty  oceans  and  swelling  seas,  her  inland  lakes 
and’ rolling  rivers;  these  tell  us  of  a  long  time  ago— of  the 
time  when  the  Mighty  One  went  forth  to  work  a  work,  to  build 
a  house  and  make  a  home  for  His  creature  man.  And  as  it 
was  necessary  in  the  preparatory  stage  to  tune  nature  to  the 
coming  man,  so  all  along  through  the  history  of  the  centuries 
we  find  nature  holding  a  subordinate  relation  to  man.  The 
world  is  not  run  on  one  principle  and  man  on  another,  but 
both  are  permeated  by  a  Divine  force  and  led  on  to  a  Divine 
end  All  things  are  ours,  and  we  are  Christ’s,  and  Christ  is 
God’s  •  this  is  the  established  order  of  subordination.  Most 
certainly  it  cannot  be  unscientific  in  the  Author  of  nature  to 
make  the  same  His  messenger  for  good  or  evil.  It  is  not  un¬ 
scientific  to  throw  a  line  from  the  shore  to  a  ship  in  distress, 
even  though  thrown  from  the  mouth  of  a  cannon,  nor  is  it 
counted  unscientific  to  use  that  same  cannon  in  war  to  destroy 

The  earthquake  spoken  of  in  the  text  is,  indeed,  a  small 
affair  in  comparison  to  some  that  have  occurred  in  this  world ; 
and  if  the  same  God  be  living  now  as  then,  surely  He  can 


64 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


rend  in  twain  the  little  mountain  of  Olivet.  And  if  we  grant 
to  the  infidel  scientist  of  to-day  the  fact  that  there  is  no  God, 
still  the  thing  prophesied  of  is  neither  unreasonable  nor  impos¬ 
sible,  because  what  has  been  may  be  again ;  and  as  the  demand 
in  this  case  is  small  in  comparison  to  what  has  been,  surely 
this  thing  may  come  to  pass.  In  times  past  Providence  and 
the  wants  of  the  Church  have  been  timely  aided  by  convulsions 
in  nature,  and  if  they  were  only  so  accidentally,  why  then 
accidentally  they  may  all  agree  again.  To  the  scientist,  es¬ 
pecially  the  geologist,  there  can  be  no  great  difficulty  in  credit¬ 
ing  the  miracles  of  the  text  when  we  think  of  the  successive 
revolutions  that  have  taken  place.  Fires,  and  floods,  and  earth¬ 
quakes  have  done  sublime  service  in  the  past,  whether  we  credit 
the  same  to  Nature  or  to  God.  That  an  earthquake,  or  any 
peculiar  expression  of  nature,  should  be  timed  to  meet  a  special 
condition  of  the  Church  or  the  special  purposes  of  a  Provi¬ 
dence,  is  not  strange.  In  such  an  event  there  really  is  no  more 
wonder  than  that  a  man  should  set  an  alarm  on  his  clock  to  go 
off  at  three  minutes  past  four  in  the  morning.  Some  men  can 
swallow  big  things  if  you  will  only  allow  them  to  make  out 
the  author  to  be  Nature.  But  whether  we  attribute  the  things 
past  to  Nature  or  to  God,  we  know  that  wonderful  things  have 
happened. 

Seismology,  the  science  of  earthquakes,  is  by  no  means  void 
of  interest.  The  earthquake  catalogue  of  the  British  Associa¬ 
tion  takes  notice  of,  and  records  the  occurence  of,  over  6,000 
that  happened  between  1606  b.c.  and  1842  a.d.  Some  of  these 
have  been  terrible  in  force,  destruction,  and  extent,  often¬ 
times  changing  the  whole  face  of  a  country,  its  climate,  and 
river  courses.  The  great  earthquake  of  1783  in  Calabria 
probably  caused  the  death  of  100,000  people;  it  was  felt  over 
a  great  part  of  Europe.  The  city  of  Lisbon  was  visited  on  the 
morning  of  November  1st,  1755,  with  an  earthquake  so  severe 
that  in  a  few  minutes  60,000  persons  perished,  and  most  of  the 
city  was  destroyed  and  buried  beneath  the  water  of  the  bay 
some  600  feet. 

The  country  given  to  Abraham  embraces  all  of  what  we  call 
Syria.  It  is  central,  and  especially  adapted  for  the  future 
purposes  of  God  through  Abraham’s  seed.  Beginning  with 
the  North-west  corner  the  boundaries  will  be  Mount  Taurus, 
river  Euphrates,  Persian  Gulf,  Arabian  Sea,  Red  Sea,  river 
Nile,  and  Mediterranean,  enclosing  Syria,  Arabia  Deserta, 
Arabia  Felix  and  Arabia  Petroea.  Thus  it  will  be  seen  that 
the  Abrahamic  inheritance  is  surrounded  by  water  except  at 
two  points — namely,  the  North-west  land  boundary  which  is 
between  the  Euphrates  and  the  Mediterranean  Sea.  The 
entrance  is  through  the  mountain  range  of  Taurus,  and  forms 
a  natural  gate  or  mountain  pass  from  Europe  and  Asia  into 
Palestine.  Here,  when  the  Tribes  are  resettled  in  the  land  of 
Palestine,  this  gate  will  be  in  the  allotment  of  Dan.  Our 
Irish  brethren  will  again  be  in  the  North-west,  where  they  will 


WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE 


65 


have  to  fight  and  defend  the  land  and  the  truth,  as  in  days  of 
old,  for  their  brethren.  The  fact  is,  “Dan  shall  judge  his 
people  as  one  of  the  Tribes  of  Israel,”  said  old  Jacob.  The 
judge  in  olden  times  sat  in  the  gate.  So  will  Dan  sit.  Moses 
said  that  Dan  was  a  lion’s  whelp.  Among  Israel  it  is  cus¬ 
tomary  to  put  lions  as  guards  at  gateways.  The  South-west 
corner  between  the  Mediterranean  and  the  Gulf  of  Suez  forms 
the  other  land  boundary.  Through  this  gate  will  come  the 
teeming  millions  of  Africa.  At  this  gate  will  be  the  Tribe 
of  Gad — that  is,  a  portion  of  the  Scots,  the  lowlanders.  The 
Tribes  will  be  hemmed  in  by  one  another  so  that  they  cannot 
enlarge  their  territory,  but  Gad  can,  for  a  vast  country  opens 
up  beyond  the  gate.  It  is  barren ;  still  the  desert  is  to  blossom 
as  a  rose.  Of  Gad  it  was  said  by  Moses,  “blessed  be  He  that 
enlargeth  Gad ;  he  dwelleth  as  a  lion  and  teareth  the  arm  with 
the  crown  of  the  head.  And  he  provided  the  first  part  for  him¬ 
self,  because  there,  in  a  portion  of  the  lawgiver,  was  he  seated.” 
You  remember  that  Sinai  is  in  this  portion.  What  sight  and 
foresight  Jacob  and  Moses  had !  The  land  as  thus  bounded 
would  be  600  miles  broad  from  the  Red  Sea  to  the  river 
Euphrates,  and  1,390  between  the  Red  Sea  and  Persian  Gulf, 
and  from  the  Mediterranean  to  the  Arabian  Sea,  1,600.  These 
boundaries  you  will  glean  by  taking  note  of  the  several  prom¬ 
ises  to  Abraham  and  his  seed  as  recorded  in  Gen.  xv.  10,  and 
Exod.  xxiii.  31,  and  Deut.  xi.  24.  The  land  so  promised  and 
given  specially  to  Abraham  and  his  seed,  the  descendants  of 
Abraham  never  yet  occupied,  no,  not  half  of  it,  even  in  the 
palmy  days  of  King  Solomon.  Will  it  ever  be?  We  answer, 
Yes,  as  sure  as  the  seasons  and  night  and  day.  He  is  faithful 
that  has  promised,  and  will  do  it. 

This  remarkable  peninsula  will  be  the  theatre  of  the  future 
glory  of  Israel  and  Judah.  As  finely  described  by  the  Rev. 
A.  B.  Grimaldi,  it  will  be  found  to  be  most  exactly  and  suit¬ 
ably  placed  to  enable  them  to  fulfil  their  high  destiny  to  all 
nations,  and  become  the  centre  of  all  lands,  the  praise  and 
beauty  of  the  whole  earth.  This  land  has,  in  fact,  a  central  posi¬ 
tion  for  communication,  commerce,  and  all  other  advantages 
of  civilisation  not  enjoyed  by  any  other  portion  of  land  in  the 
whole  world ;  while  the  peculiar  geographical  formation  is 
such  that  it  has  an  immense  seaboard,  and  is  therefore  fitted 
for  vaster  commercial  and  naval  operations  than  have  ever  yet 
been  seen,  commanding,  as  it  does,  three  most  important  seas 
and  two  of  the  largest  rivers  of  the  whole  world. 

This  land,  as  laid  out  by  Ezekiel,  will  be  divided  into  thirteen 
longitudinal  strips,  sixty  miles  long,  and  twenty  broad.  In  the 
very  centre  will  be  a  portion,  some  fifty  miles  square,  which 
will  be  divided  and  apportioned  to  what  is  called  the  holy  obla¬ 
tion — namely,  in  the  very  middle  will  be  the  temple,  a  mile 
square,  or  larger  than  even  the  whole  city  of  Jerusalem  has  yet 
been.  Then  the  city  will  be  ten  miles  square.  On  one  side 
will  be  a  portion  for  the  priests ;  on  another,  a  portion  for  the 


66 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


Levites ;  and  on  the  other  two  sides,  the  prince’s  or  king’s 
portion.  This  portion,  which  will  be  on  the  East  and  West 
sides,  will  be  sixty  miles  long  by  ten  broad,  or  some  600  miles 
square.  But  it  is  clear  he  will  need  it,  for  he  will  not  be  sup¬ 
ported  by  taxes.  He  will  have  to  judge  the  land.  He  can¬ 
not  take  any  more  land.  He  will  have  to  support  his  own 
family.  No  public  grant  to  his  children.  He  will  have  to  be 
liberal  with  the  temple.  He  will  have  sixty  miles  of  sea  coast 
to  defend  and  sixty  miles  of  land  frontier  to  protect,  and  thus 
cover  some  of  the  weaker  tribes.  The  city  will  have  720  square 
miles  as  a  suburb,  in  which  to  raise  supplies  specially  for  itself. 
It  will  in  reality  be  in  two  parts — one  called  by  the  prophets  the 
profane ;  here  will  the  commercial  business  be  done.  The  other 
part  will  be  sacred.  Into  it  strangers  will  not  enter ;  it  will  be 
holy — a  quiet  habitation.  “There  the  glorious  Lord  will  be 
unto  us  a  place  of  broad  rivers  and  streams,  wherein  shall  go 
no  galley  with  oars,  neither  shall  gallant  ships  pass  thereby.” 
The  city  proper  will  be  some  thirty  miles  north  of  the  present 
city  of  Jerusalem. 


Discourse  XII. — Nineteen  Hundred  and  Fifty-seven. 

“Signs  of  the  Times ” — The  Return  to  Jerusalem — Forces  of 
Russia  and  England — Present  Locality  of  Ancient  Nations 
— Origin  of  American  Republicanism — Federation  of  the 
Nations  Coming — Evolution  and  Devolution. 

“Blessed  is  he  that  waiteth,  and  cometh  to  the  thousand  three 
hundred  and  five  and  thirty  days.” — Daniel  xii.  12. 

So  according  to  the  prophet  Daniel  there  is  a  time  to  come  in 
which  it  will  be  blessed  to  live.  The  prophecies  of  Daniel  are 
generally  of  a  material  character — that  is,  they  have  special 
reference  to  this  world  politically,  and  to  this  end  he  had 
direct  and  special  reference  to  certain  kingdoms  in  existence  at 
the  time  of  writing,  as  well  as  others  that  were  to  come  into 
being.  Of  all  the  prophets  he  concerns  himself  the  most  with 
positive  data  of  the  rise  and  fall  of  nations.  The  figures  of 
the  data  used  we  freely  confess  are  difficult  to  understand  and 
interpret.  The  Church  and  times  are  greatly  in  need  of  some 
man  competent  on  this  point.  All  prophetic  students  know 
the  diversity  and  confusion  in  this  department  of  theology. 
Of  all  the  difficult  departments  of  theology  none  exceed  the 
numerical.  The  numerical  symbolism  of  the  Bible  is  as  yet 
but  little  understood.  True,  indeed,  we  are  improving.  Aided 
by  Providence,  we  are  enabled  to  interpret  some  dates  by  data 
— that  is,  certain  events  occurring  locate  us  and  point  out  the 


NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN 


67 


prophetic  period  we  are  in.  Like  the  captain  who  is  unable 
by  his  certain  and  usual  modes  of  calculating  to  find  his 
whereabouts,  does  so  by  currents,  the  Gulf-stream,  islands, 
colour  of  waters,  etc.,  did  we  know  the  exact  quantity  of 
Daniel’s  two  thousand  and  three  hundred  days,  his  times,  time, 
and  half  a  time,  his  seventy  weeks,  his  thousand  two  hundred 
and  ninety  days,  and  the  thousand  three  hundred  and  five  and 
thirty  days,  then  we  could  deal  with  the  prophecies  with  a  def¬ 
initiveness  to  which  as  yet  we  are  strangers. 

The  times,  however,  are  peculiarly  interesting  from  the  very 
fact  that  the  Church  is  waking  up  to  the  importance  of  pro¬ 
phetic  study.  “Coming  events  cast  their  shadows  before”  is  a 
trite  but  true  saying,  and  here  as  true  as  anywhere.  Men  feel 
in  their  fears  and  hopes  the  pressure  of  prophecy.  The  Church 
is  remarkably  anxious  and  full  of  unrest.  Governments  are 
suspicious  and  confused.  The  populace  are  restless  and 
threatening.  Indeed,  everything  conspires  in  Church,  State, 
and  people,  to  forecast  the  future.  A  thunderstorm  is  felt  be¬ 
fore  it  is  seen  or  heard.  It  shadows  the  mind,  thrills  the 
nerves,  and  pains  the  rheumatic  limbs.  Many  in  1858  felt  war 
coming  in  our  own  country.  Many  were  at  a  loss  to  interpret 
their  fears.  Some,  however,  interpreted  the  signs  of  the  time 
and  sounded  an  alarm. 

The  few  years  to  come  are  pregnant  with  angry  forces.  Men 
are  busy  in  Russia,  Germany,  b  ranee,  England  and  America, 
sowing  the  winds,  and  the  harvest  will  surely  be  whirlwinds. 
But,  beyond  all,  the  sky  is  clear.  War  ceases,  commerce  re¬ 
vives,  the  nations  accept  a  settled  peace,  science  and  religion 
join  hand  in  hand  to  repair  the  wastes  and  woes  of  war.  The 
beast  is  overcome.  Anti-Christ  is  slain,  and  the  dragon  is 
banished  from  the  earth.  Jerusalem  again  rises  in  splendour 
from  the  grave  of  desolation.  Again  Canaan  will  become  the 
glory  of  all  lands,  and  Jerusalem  the  glory  of  Canaan.  Here, 
again,  after  centuries  of  wandering,  shall  the  throne  of  David 
find  rest,  and  on  it  one  of  David’s  seed,  chosen  and  anointed 
of  God,  accepted  of  men,  and  served  by  the  nations.  Crowned 
and  imperial  Salem  shall  become  the  home  of  her  long-captive 
sons  and  daughters.  Israel  and  Judah  shall  meet  together,  and 
shall  be  one  stick,  one  people,  having  one  head,  one  throne,  one 
city,  one  Lord,  even  Jesus.  “Therefore,  they  shall  come  and 
sing  in  the  height  of  Zion,  and  shall  flow  together  to  the  good¬ 
ness  of  the  Lord,  for  wheat,  and  for  wine,  and  for  oil,  and  for 
the  young  of  the  flock  and  of  the  herd;  and  their  soul  shall 
be  as  a  watered  garden,  and  they  shall  not  sorrow  any  more 
at  all”  (Jeremiah  xxxi.  12). 

No  one  can  read  the  prophecies  that  find  their  fulfilment 
after  the  battle  of  Armageddon — or,  as  the  prophets  have  it, 
“after  those  days”— without  being  ravished  with  delight. 
Israel  in  her  palmy  days,  and  Judah  in  her  glory!  A  nation 
called  of  God,  and  ruled  by  God  through  a  David  or  a  Solomon, 
how  inviting !  When  Heaven  was  their  Defence  and  Provider, 


68 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


when  the  fidelity  of  men  to  God  was  enough  of  defence,  and 
the  morality  of  a  people  was  a  rich  manure  giving  an  abundant 
harvest  in  field,  stall,  and  orchard,  then  we  see  the  true  posi¬ 
tion  of  a  nation,  its  grandeur  and  prosperity.  I  am  convinced 
that  morality  has  a  more  intimate  relation  with  the  forces  and 
wealth  of  nature  than  we  are  in  the  habit  of  believing.  God 
can  give  increased  measure  to  the  harvest,  fruitfulness  to  the 
vine,  plenty  in  the  orchard,  increase  in  the  stall,  and  addition 
to  the  household.  Time  upon  time  are  these  blessings  promised 
by  the  prophets  to  Israel  and  Judah  in  the  latter  days. 

Take  notice  of  a  few  statements  of  the  prophets  responding 
to  those  times — the  times  that  will  ensue  after  the  Ten  Lost 
Tribes  of  Israel  and  the  Jews  are  again  possessed  of,  and 
settled  in,  Palestine.  Jeremiah,  in  the  30th  chapter  and  31st, 
refers  to  those  times :  “For,  lo,  the  days  come,  saith  the  Lord, 
that  I  will  bring  again  the  captivity  of  My  people,  Israel  and 
Judah,  saith  the  Lord:  and  I  will  cause  them  to  return  to  the 
land  that  I  gave  to  their  fathers,  and  they  shall  possess  it” — 
referring  to  this  time  and  the  battle  of  Armageddon,  in  which 
Israel  will  be  tested  as  we  have  before  shown.  “Alas  !  for  that 
day  is  great,  so  that  none  is  like  it ;  it  is  even  the  time  of  Jacob’s 
trouble;  but  he  shall  be  saved  out  of  it.”  Now,  we  ask,  why 
will  it  be  specially  a  time  of  trouble?  We  answer,  Because 
of  the  strength  of  the  combined  forces  that  will  be  arrayed 
against  Israel — that  is,  England.  The  forces,  as  set  forth  in 
the  Scriptures,  are  thirteen  on  one  side,  led  by  Russia,  and 
four  on  the  other,  which  will  be  led  by  England.  The  thirteen 
are:  1st,  Gog;  2nd,  Magog;  3rd,  Rosh;  4th,  Meshech;  5th, 
Tubal;  6th,  Persia;  7th,  Ethiopia;  8th,  Libya;  9th,  Gomer; 
10th,  Togarmah;  11th,  the  Beast;  12th,  the  Dragon;  and  13th, 
anti-Christ.  The  four  are:  1st,  Sheba;  2nd,  Dedan;  3rd, 
Merchants  of  Tarshish  with  all  their  young  lions ;  4th,  the 
Jews  and  Israelites  settled  in  Palestine,  who  will  not  be  led 
astray  by  the  anti-Christ. 

To  understand  the  prophets  when  forecasting  the  future,  we 
must  keep  in  mind  that  in  speaking  of  a  nation’s  destiny  in 
the  future,  they  would  speak  of  it  by  the  name  it  had  at  that 
time,  if  such  a  nation  had  an  existence  at  that  time.  But  in 
course  of  time,  such  nations  would  change  their  name,  and 
sometimes  locality ;  in  such  a  case  they  must  be  found.  For 
instance,  if  one  desires  to  know  the  destiny  of  Turkey,  he  will 
find  it  set  forth  by  the  prophets  under  the  name  of  Edom  and 
Esau.  Moab  and  Ammon  are  found  in  the  Poles  and  Hun¬ 
garians;  they  were  the  sons  of  Lot.  In  all  parts  of  the  world 
the  children  of  Abraham  have  an  attachment  for  each  other. 
Thus  India  was  peopled  at  first  by  the  descendants  of  Abra¬ 
ham  ;  hence  they  will  mix  with,  and  accept  English  rule  sooner 
than  any  other  people.  “But  unto  the  sons  of  the  concu¬ 
bines  which  Abraham  had,  Abraham  gave  gifts,  and  sent  them 
away  from  Isaac  his  son,  while  he  yet  lived,  Eastward,  unto 
the  East  country”  (Gen.  xxv.  6).  If  we  trace  back  the  origin 


NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN  69 

of  a  people  to  their  head  or  founder,  we  will  better  under¬ 
stand  their  peculiarities  and  national  idiosyncrasies.  Study 
Ishmael  to  understand  the  Arabs,  Esau  to  understand  the 
Turks,  Ammon  and  Moab  to  understand  the  Poles  and  Hunga¬ 
rians.  Study  the  character  and  condition  of  Manasseh  in  Egypt, 
as  being  brought  up  in  a  palace  and  being  the  lawful  heir,  but 
deprived  of  his  birthright  by  a  Providence  which  he  could  not 
understand,  and  you  have  at  once  a  key  to  the  Pilgrim  char¬ 
acter,  and  the  characteristics  of  a  real  American — why  he  hates 
titles,  kings  and  aristocracies.  But  he  forgets  not  the  place  of 
his  youth  when  he  had  the  great  seal  made ;  for  on  the  reverse 
of  the  great  seal  of  the  United  States  you  will  have  the  figure 
of  a  Pyramid  crowned  with  the  All-seeing  Eye.  No  Tribe  but 
the  Tribe  of  Manasseh  could  say,  or  did  say,  “We  are  a  great 
people.”  Yet  so  this  Tribe  said  to  Joshua  (see  Josh.  xvii).  So 
we  often  say,  “We  are  a  great  people.” 

Rachel  and  Leah,  the  two  wives  of  Jacob,  are  the  real  source 
of  the  separation  of  the  Ten  Tribes  of  Israel  from  Judah. 
Each  wife  sought  to  have  her  sons  as  the  leader.  Thus  be¬ 
tween  Judah  and  Joseph  began  the  spirit  of  rivalry.  Ephraim 
took  up  the  cause  of  Rachel.  David  and  Saul’s  bitterness  lies 
here.  David  stood  for  Leah,  and  Saul  for  Rachel.  The  de¬ 
scendants  of  the  North  of  Ireland,  being  from  the  Tribe  of  Dan, 
have  ever  been  distinct  from  the  rest  of  the  Irish  in  features, 
enterprise,  spirit,  and  religion ;  for  the  others  are  the  Canaan- 
ites  of  old,  the  Philistines. 

Who  do  the  thirteen  enemies  stand  for  to-day?  Let  me 
answer  you  briefly.  Gog  stands  for  the  Caucasians  or  moun¬ 
tain  tribes  of  Caucasus.  Magog  covers  the  inhabitants  and 
country  North  of  the  Caucasian  mountains,  and  they  are 
known  as  Tartars.  Rosh,  or  Roosh,  means  the  real  Russians. 
Their  ruler  is  called  by  the  prophet  Ezekiel  Nasi  Roosh.  We 
translate  it  the  chief  prince  of  Meshech.  This  portion,  or  peo¬ 
ple  of  Russia,  are  the  old  Babylonians,  hence  the  hate  and 
rivalry  between  England  and  that  nation.  Meshech  means  the 
Muscovites,  who  made  Moscow  what  it  is.  Tubal  is  found  in 
the  Siberians.  Meshech  and  Tubal  are  generally  mentioned 
together  in  the  Scriptures,  and  strange  to  say,  they  are  found 
together  in  history  to-day.  Moscow  is  the  captital  of  Meshech, 
for  though  to  the  world  St.  Petersburg  seems  to  be,  yet  eveiy 
imperial  document  is  signed  and  dated  Moscow.  Tobolsk  is 
the  capital  of  Tubal  or  Siberia.  Persia  still  retains  its  ancient 
name,  and  will  be  easily  recognized.  Also  the  same  with 
Ethiopia.  Libya  takes  in  a  portion  of  the  African  race. 
Gomer  stands  for  the  Germans  in  part,  for  those  who  descend¬ 
ed  from  Gomer.  From  this  word  Gomer  is  Gomeron,  Gemren, 
and  the  country  Germia,  hence,  Germany  and  Germans.  To- 
garmah  includes  the  people  of  Independent  Tartary.  The  Drag¬ 
on  includes  China.  The  Beast,  the  Jesuits  and  their  followers, 
which  will  take  in  France,  Spain,  Italy,  and  South  America; 
and  at  first  divide  even  England,  especially  Ireland,  and  the 


70 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


United  States.  Anti-Christ  will  be  chiefly  sustained  by  the 
Jews  who  will  have  been  settled  in  Palestine. 

The  four  opposing  forces  led  by  England :  Sheba  represents 
India,  who  is  already  training  for  this  time  of  battle.  Dedan 
embraces  Arabia,  especially  that  part  occupied  by  the  Sultan  of 
Muscat.  Merchants  of  Tarshish  and  all  the  young  lions,  means 
England  and  her  colonies,  in  which  is  embraced  the  United 
States.  Manasseh  will  have  to  stretch  out  a  helping  hand  to 
Jacob  in  the  time  of  his  trouble,  for  she  cannot  allow  liberty  to 
be  enslaved  and  freedom  of  worship  and  conscience  to  be 
trampled  under  foot.  The  plague  will  come  here  sooner  than 
we  think,  by  a  civil  and  internal  division  among  ourselves, 
which  will  force  us  to  take  part.  The  Jews  that  are  not  carried 
away  with  anti-Christ  will  join  with  their  brethren  of  Israel. 
The  called,  the  chosen,  and  the  faithful,  will  be  one  party,  and 
they  will  be  on  the  Lord’s  side. 

If,  during  the  Turkish  war  of  1878,  we  could  have  had  our 
dispatches  agreeable  to  ancient  names  of  people  and  country, 
they  would  have  sounded  queer.  Instead  of  reading  of  the 
Russians  passing  the  Caucasus,  and  moving  upon  Erzeroum  by 
way  of  Kars,  we  should  have  read :  Rapid  advance  of  the 
Babylonians  under  the  chief  prince  of  Meshceh.  Successful 
passage  of  the  Pison.  The  whole  land  of  Havilah  occupied. 
The  men  of  Togarmah  rally  at  Gihon.  Fierce  fighting  in  Eden. 
The  invaders  defeated  in  the  mountains  of  Ararat.  For  ac¬ 
cording  to  ancient  names  of  people  and  country,  such  was  the 
fact.  It  is  comforting  to  all  God’s  people  to  know  from  His 
Word  that  there  is  a  time  of  peace;  that  there  is  a  golden  age 
in  the  near  future. 

When  will  the  1,335  days  of  years,  spoken  of  in  the  text, 
end?  We  answer,  About  the  year  1957.  And  why  that  year? 
Because  these  days  evidently  date  there,  beginning  from  the 
time  the  daily  sacrifice  is  taken  away  and  the  city  trodden  under 
foot.  The  little  goat  horn  of  Daniel  viii.  9  stands,  we  have 
before  shown  you,  for  Turkey.  “And  out  of  one  of  them  came 
forth  a  little  horn,  which  waxed  exceeding  great  toward  the 
South,  and  toward  the  East,  and  toward  the  pleasant  land.”  It 
stands  for  Mohammedanism,  which  was  to  overturn  Christian¬ 
ity  for  a  given  period,  a  time,  times,  and  a  half  time,  or  in 
figures  1260.  Now,  Mohammed  was  accepted  and  crowned  at 
Mecca  in  the  year  622.  If  we  add  1260  and  622,  we  have  1882 
— a  time  that  is  very  plainly  pointed  out  in  the  Pyramid.  Dan¬ 
iel  says,  “Seventy  weeks  are  determined  upon  Thy  people  and 
upon  Thy  holy  city,”  Jerusalem.  These  weeks  put  into  pro¬ 
phetic  years  make  490,  which,  of  course,  brings  us  to  the  time 
when  Jerusalem  was  destroyed  by  Titus.  Daniel  asked  how 
long  the  vision  concerning  the  daily  sacrifice  and  transgression 
of  desolation  to  give  the  sanctuary  and  people  to  be  trodden 
down  ?  The  answer  was,  unto  2,300  days,  taking  a  day  for  a 
year.  Jerusalem  was  destroyed  in  year  70.  Take  this  from 
490  and  we  have  420.  Now  these  420  years  taken  from  2300 


NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN 


71 


will  bring  1880.  Then  the  sanctuary  is  to  be  cleansed — that 
is,  Jerusalem  will  be  in  the  possession  of  England.  She  now 
is. 

From  about  1880,  or  1882,  England  will  possess  Jerusalem. 
In  the  twelfth  chapter  of  Daniel,  eleventh  verse,  we  find  thirty 
days  added  to  the  1260,  making  1290 ;  these  added  thirty  years 
denote  the  time  England  will  have  to  contend  for  her  right  to 
Palestine.  It  will  finally  be  acknowledged,  however  by  all 
nations.  In  1935  the  battle  of  Armageddon  will  end,  but 
Palestine  will  not  be  fully  settled  down  to  a  peaceful  possession 
till  1957.  Then  the  Government  will  be  fully  established  and 
acknowledged  all  over  the  world.  The  kings  and  Gentile 
nations  will  have  gone  up  to  Jerusalem  and  given  in  their  ad¬ 
herence.  Then  all  the  world  will  be  federated  to  David’s 
throne.  The  year  1957  I  arrive  at  by  the  same  rule  as  the 
other— 1335  when  added  to  622,  makes  1957.  “Blessed,”  says 
Daniel,  “are  they  who  see  that  time.” 

The  world  is  to  undergo  some  marvellous  changes  these  next 
few  years — mechanically,  politically,  socially,  and  morally ;  the 
telephone,  the  phonograph,  the  microphone,  the  telamachone 
and  coming  improvements  will  transform  our  modes  of  labour 
and  learning  beyond  our  present  conception.  God  times  in¬ 
ventions  and  improvement  to  the  advancements  of  His  king¬ 
dom. 

I  do  not  regard  inventions  as  mere  accidents,  but  as  the 
outcoming  of  a  Divine  intent  through  human  agencies.  Watts 
and  Wesley  both  did  good  service  for  the  Church  and  the 
world.  Edison  and  others  of  kindred  minds  are  scientific 
prophets.  “The  earth  is  the  Lord’s  and  the  fulness  thereof.” 
All  is  made  subservient  to  the  progress  of  the  kingdom  of 
heaven.  The  doctrine  of  the  evolution  of  man  as  taught  by 
Darwin  is  neither  complimentary  to  man  or  God ;  but  the 
doctrine  of  devolution  is.  Man  is  a  developing  creature ;  a 
creature  who  takes  centuries  to  grow  in.  The  devolution  of 
God  is  through  man  by  means  of  all  the  increasing  facilities 
and  agencies  that  make  man  stronger,  wiser,  and  better.  The 
secret  powers  and  forces  of  nature  are  revealed  to  man  in  the 
ratio  of  his  ability  to  apply  them,  on  the  same  scale  as  we  in¬ 
struct  our  children. 

In  the  latter  days,  or  the  period  spoken  of  by  Daniel,  nature 
will  be  Divinely  prompted  with  an  impulse  of  generosity  not 
now  known,  for  then  men  will  be  wise  enough,  strong  enough, 
and  good  enough,  to  use  the  same  and  not  abuse.  The  pro¬ 
phetic  teachings  glow  with  promises  of  regaling  plenty,  peace, 
and  good  will,  in  those  days.  “I  will  multiply  upon  you  man  and 
beast;  and  they  shall  increase  and  bring  fruit;  and  I  will  settle 
you  after  your  old  estates,  and  will  do  better  unto  you  than  at 
your  beginnings ;  and  ye  shall  know  that  I  am  the  Lord 
(Ezek.  xxxvi.  11).  Again:  “I  will  multiply  the  fruit  of  the 
tree,  and  the  increase  of  the  field,  that  ye  receive  no  more  re¬ 
proach  of  famine,  among  the  heathen.”  I  submit  and  believe 


72 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


that  all  this  God  will  do  by  what  men  are  pleased  to  call  natural 
law.  The  Divine  will  not  rudely  break  in  upon  His  own  estab¬ 
lished  laws. 

Sin  impairs  the  energy  and  growth  of  man,  and  so  infringes 
upon  Nature.  As  man  frees  himself  from  the  bondage  and 
sequences  of  sin,  he  will  rise  higher  and  higher  in  his  command 
and  authority  over  nature’s  forces.  Three  several  times  the 
earth  has  been  cursed,  which  curse  is  gradually  removed  as 
man  returns  unto  his  God  in  loving  and  obedient  service.  “And 
now  art  thou  cursed  from  the  earth,  which  hath  opened  her 
mouth  to  receive  thy  brother’s  blood  from  thy  hand.  When 
thou  tillest  the  ground,  it  shall  not  henceforth  yield  unto  thee 
her  strength”  (Gen.  iv.  11).  The  secret  of  a  world’s  wealth 
and  peace  lies  here,  and  it  were  well  if  reformers  and  agitators 
understood  this.  For  they  work  best  who  work  in  harmony 
with  God  and  His  laws. 


73 


Discourse  XIII. — The  Stone  Witness.* 

The  Great  Pyramid — Who  Job  Was — Who  Built  the  Pyramid 
— What  It  Was  Built  For — An  Epitome  of  the  Earth — The 
History  of  Man  Contained  In  It,  Past  and  Future — 
Science  and  the  Bible,  etc.,  etc. 

“In  that  day  there  shall  be  an  altar  to  the  Lord  in  the  midst  of 
the  land  of  Egypt,  and  a  pillar  at  the  border  thereof  to  the  Lord; 
and  it  shall  be  for  a  sign  and  for  a  witness  unto  the  Lord  of  hosts 
in  the  land  of  Egypt.” — Isaiah  xix.  19. 

The  wonderful  discourses  of  the  Rev.  Dr.  Wild,  of  Brooklyn, 
were  continued  last  Sunday  Evening,  before  a  thronged  con¬ 
gregation  in  Elm  Place  Church.  Under  the  organ  gallery,  be¬ 
hind  the  pulpit,  was  a  representation  of  the  Pyramid,  or,  as  the 
learned  doctor  terms  it,  “the  stone  Bible,”  its  massive  rectan¬ 
gular  dark  stone  foundation  and  some  of  the  most  interesting 
of  its  interior  passages,  chambers,  and  mysteries.  All  eyes  were 
fastened  in  scrutiny  upon  it,  well  knowing  that  some  revela¬ 
tions  of  unusual  Christian  interest  would  be  made  by  the  Doc¬ 
tor  from  it  as  soon  as  his  lecture  commenced.  After  the  pre¬ 
liminary  exercises  of  singing  by  a  well-trained  choir,  and 
prayer,  the  thoughts  were  concentrated  on  the  wonders  of  the 
Pyramid  and  its  astounding  confirmation  of  the  prophetic 
Scriptures.  Dr.  Wild  read  a  lesson  from  Job  xxxviii.,  re¬ 
marking  that  the  author  of  that  book  was  also  the  engineer¬ 
ing  director  or  architectural  author  of  the  Pyramid  and  identi¬ 
cal  with  Shem  and  Melchisedec.  The  book  of  Job  is  the  oldest 
book  in  the  world  by  200  or  300  years.  Shem,  or  Job,  was 
ninety-eight  years  old  when  he  entered  the  ark,  and  he  lived 
thirty  years  after  Abraham,  with  whom  therefore  he  shook 
hands  as  well  as  with  Methuselah,  who  shook  hands  with 

♦This  Discourse  we  give  to  the  reader  as  originally  reported.  In 
all  the  others  we  have  excluded  the  reporter’s  introduction  and 
personal  references. 


74 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


Adam.  Only  one  man,  therefore,  stood  between  Adam  and 
Shem,  and  only  two,  or  not  quite  two,  between  Adam  and 
Abraham.  The  book  of  Berosus,  of  Babylon,  is  the  only  one 
that  compares  with  Job  in  antiquity.  This  was  the  age  of  tra¬ 
dition  before  Moses  compiled  the  first  portions  of  it.  In  the 
days  of  Abraham,  Shem  was  the  patriarch  or  oldest  of  his 
family,  and  it  was  therefore  to  him  he  did  homage  according  to 
the  patriarchal  custom  under  the  name  of  Melchisedec  when 
returning  from  the  slaughter  of  the  kings.  Shem  had  brought 
with  him  from  the  days  before  the  flood  much  of  the  know¬ 
ledge  and  wisdom  which  had  been  accumulated  in  the  earth 
during  the  2,000  years  previous  to  that  event,  and  which  was 
swept  away  when  only  eight  persons  were  saved  in  the  ark.  We 
have  been  told  that  the  human  race  has  gradually  improved, 
and  that  our  ancestors  in  far  off  ages  were  monkeys,  or  some¬ 
thing  of  that  sort,  but  the  remains  of  the  ruins  and  knowledge 
of  antiquity  show  everything  the  reverse  of  this  to  be  the  truth. 
Look  at  that  Pyramid.  We  could  not  build  it  to-day  with  all 
our  boasted  science.  It  will  bear  in  every  respect  the  closest 
scientific  scrutiny.  Our  greatest  scientists  are  only  beginning 
to  comprehend  the  depths  of  its  mysteries,  yet  it  is  over  4,000 
years  old.  The  capstone  on  the  top  of  it  is  a  pyramid  in  itself  in 
miniature  unlike  anything  of  the  kind  or  any  other  building 
on  the  earth.  The  reverend  gentleman  then  continued  to  read 
from  Job  xxxviii.,  and  show  that  the  writer  of  it  was  master  of 
astronomical  and  geographical  science  and  the  builder  of  the 
Pyramid,  which  is  a  miniature  of  the  measurement  of  the  earth, 
and  indicates  the  history  of  the  human  race.  After  this  pre¬ 
liminary  dissertion  he  took  for  his  text  Isaiah  xxviii.  29  :  “This 
also  cometh  forth  from  the  Lord  of  hosts,  which  is  wonderful 
in  counsel,  and  excellent  in  working.” 

The  Bible  is  a  growing  book,  being  more  read  and  better 
understood  as  the  years  pass  by;  and  as  men  shall  increase  in 
knowledge  and  power,  so  the  Bible  will  gain  in  influence  and 
authority.  Opposition  to  its  teaching,  and  vaulting  denial  of 
its  authority,  shall  be  made  subservient  to  its  interests  by  goad¬ 
ing  on  the  Church  to  a  wiser  and  more  noble  defence  and  ex¬ 
position  of  the  same.  Now  theology  can  levy  upon  the  well- 
defined  facts  of  science  in  confirmation  of  the  sublime  teach¬ 
ings  of  inspiration.  The  Christian  student  need  not  hold  him¬ 
self  in  timid  dread  for  fear  the  scientists  will  discover  aught 
in  the  realms  of  nature  that  will  contradict  the  Word  of  God; 
for  as  sure  as  God  is  the  Author  of  both,  so  surely  shall  we  find 
an  agreement  between  revelation  and  science  at  every  point 
truly  understood — increased  light  means  increased  evidence. 
Nations  and  men,  nature  and  Providence,  are  united  witnesses 
for  God,  and  the  Scriptures,  and  the  more  we  know  of  the 
past,  the  better  we  shall  understand  the  present  and  forecast 
the  future.  Let  us  recognise  the  future.  Let  us  recognise  the 
important  difference  between  the  Bible  subjectively  and  objec¬ 
tively — that  is,  between  what  the  Bible  really  is  and  what 


THE  STONE  WITNESS 


75 


men  think  it  is.  Let  us  be  free  enough,  bold  enough,  and 
wise  enough,  to  claim  the  Bible  itself.  Let  us  unyoke  it  from 
tradition  which  claims  to  be  superior  or  even  equal.  Let 
us  divorce  it  from  councils,  from  creeds,  from  sects  and  de¬ 
nominations;  let  us  lift  it  up  out  of  the  ecclesiastical  rut  of 
ages.  Let  us  with  a  commendable  pride  count  ourselves 
worthy  and  able  to  formulate  our  own  creeds,  make  our  own 
prayers  and  confessions,  accounting  that  the  liberties  of  our 
fathers  have  been  bequeathed  to  their  children,  and  that  the 
same  God  who  gave  them  liberty  and  power  is  no  less  gracious 
to  us,  their  offspring.  Traditions,  councils,  creeds,  and  decrees 
are  worth  much  unto  us  as  aids  to  a  higher  life,  and  a  nobler 
civilisation.  The  Christian  Fathers,  the  Luthers,  Calvins, 
Knoxes,  Wesleys,  and  others,  were  our  servants,  as  we  will  be 
the  servants  of  coming  generations.  They  worked  grandly, 
they  wrought  well,  they  procured  for  us  a  goodly  heritage .  to 
them  we  are  indebted.  Yet  it  was  not  their  purpose  nor  the 
design  of  Providence  to  enslave  us,  or  to. stereotype  the  Church 
for  the  ages  to  come.  Increased  light  is  increased  evidence,  en¬ 
abling  us  the  better  to  understand  the  Word  of  God.  When  a 
publisher  has  stereotyped  a  book,  he  is  naturally  loath  to  make 
any  change  or  correction ;  so  Churches  who  have  stereotyped 
the  Bible  are  very  unwilling  to  change,  to  receive  light.  Hence 
they  are  sometimes  found  opposing  the  march  of  a  better 
civilisation,  proving  and  sustaining  all  manner  of  institutions 
and  tyrannies ;  the  torturing  and  terrible  inquisition  of  Spain, 
the  punishment  and  hanging  of  supposed  witches  by  Lng  and 
and  New  England,  the  bondage  and  slavery  of  the  South.  So,  to 
prove  the  creeds  and  systems  correct,  they  each  have  a  mode 
of  their  own,  Catholic,  Episcopalian,  Baptist,  Congregational, 
Methodist,  etc.  So  also,  theologians  have  often  been  impa¬ 
tient  to  reconcile  the  Scriptures  with  history,  even  to  suggest 
mistakes  in  the  sacred  record.  Instance  Daniel  being  made  the 
THIRD  RULER.  They  supposed  it  meant  second,  but  later  re¬ 
searches  show  that  Babylon  had  two  rulers  at  that  time  name¬ 
ly,  Nebuchadnezzar  and  Belshazzar,  so  Daniel  was  made  a 
third.  See  the  remains  of  Borsippa  near  Babylon  (Dan.  v.  29 ) . 
Now  we  know  that  both  Daniel  and  Berosus,  the  old  Babylo¬ 
nian  historians,  were  right,  and  the  Bible  was  right  in  using 
the  word  third.  God  in  His  revelation  has  always  been  equal 
to  man’s  need.  Tradition— Abraham  saw  Shem,  for  Shem 
lived  for  some  thirty  years  after  Abraham’s  death.  Shem,  and 
Melchisedek,  and  Job,  are  likely  the  same  person.  Certain  y, 
Shem  and  Melchisedek  are  the  same,  and  by  Eg7Ptian  hls 
tnrians  called  Philitis.  This  Philitis  was  the  builder  of  the 
Great  Pyramid.  Now  Shem  saw  Methuselah  and  Methuselah 
Adam  ^hus,  then,  tradition  would  be  sufficient.  As  tra¬ 
dition  failed  the  written  Word  began.  There  is  little  doubt 
now  but  that  Shem,  called  also  Melcishedek,  was  the  builder 
of  the  Pyramid,  being  instructed  of  God,  as  his  father  Noai 
had  beet/in  building  the  ark,  and  as  Moses  with  the  tabernacle, 


76 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


and  Solomon  with  the  temple,  as  the  prophet  in  the  text  and 
context  shows  that  the  wisdom  of  the  man  is  often  the  gift  of 
God.  See  Moses  also.  “And  the  Lord  spake  unto  Moses,  say¬ 
ing:  See,  I  have  called  by  name  Bezaleel,  the  son  of  Uri,  the 
son  of  Hur,  of  the  tribe  of  Judah;  and  I  have  filled  him  with 
the  Spirit  of  God,  in  wisdom,  and  in  understanding,  and  in 
knowledge,  and  in  all  manner  of  workmanship :  to  devise  cun¬ 
ning  works,  to  work  in  gold,  and  in  silver,  and  in  brass,  and  in 
cutting  of  stones,  to  set  them,  and  in  carving  of  timber,  to 
work  in  all  manner  of  workmanship.  And,  behold,  I  have 
given  him  Aholiab,  the  son  of  Ahisamach,  of  the  tribe  of  Dan ; 
and  in  the  hearts  of  all  that  are  wise-hearted  I  have  put  wis¬ 
dom  that  they  may  make  all  that  I  have  commanded  thee” 
(Exodus  xxxi.  1 — 6). 

Let  us  look  at  this  building,  for  it  is  a  special  revelation  for 
these  times.  For  this  precise  and  scientific  day  God  has 
provided.  Science  and  the  Bible  are  interlocked  in  this  build¬ 
ing;  they  agree,  they  testify  for  the  same  God,  yet  they  wit¬ 
ness  to  the  same  Christ,  the  Providence  and  history  of  His 
chosen  people.  This  stone  book  could  not  be  read  till  now ;  it 
even  takes  the  most  precise  scientific  men  of  the  day  to  read 
it.  For  thousands  of  years  there  has  been  no  one  in  the  court 
of  the  world  able  to  question  and  interpret  this  witness  of  the 
Lord  in  Egypt.  The  scientists  have  been  asking  for  some 
other  revelation  than  the  Bible,  for  the  supernatural  in  a 
scientific  form,  for  something  beyond  man,  for  something  all 
could  see,  for  something  that  would  answer  to  pure  science,  for 
something  that  could  be  seen,  handled,  measured,  tested,  and 
amenable  to  mathematics :  something  superhuman,  for  some¬ 
thing  in  which  the  human  and  the  Divine  blend.  Thank 
Heaven,  all  they  ask  is  granted  in  this  stone  monument.  Here 
we  have  science  forecast  for  thousands  of  years ;  here  we  have 
the  grandest  of  problems  in  science  solved,  and  the  sublimest 
phenomena  of  religion  and  science  crystalised,  symbolising  and 
teaching  the  most  marvellous  facts  in  religion,  sociology,  and 
astronomy.  It  is  not  a  tomb,  nor  granary,  nor  temple,  but  a 
pillar  and  witness  unto  the  Lord  of  hosts.  Think  of  a  few 
facts.  1.  Its  location,  the  centre  of  the  land  surface  of  the 
whole  earth.  Hence  the  best  zero  point  on  earth  for  meridional 
and  latitudinal  calculations.  Central  to  clime— here  is  no  rust, 
moss,  nor  frosts  to  destroy,  nor  earthquake — a  well-chosen 
spot  for  such  a  pillar.  2.  Its  form  and  size — symbolising  the 
earth  quantity  in  its  weight  of  five  millions  of  tons — the 
freight  of  1,250  of  the  largest  steamers  leaving  New  York. 
Its  shape,  or  inclination  from  base  to  apex,  the  same  as  from 
the  pole  to  the  equator.  To  express  this  the  builder  sloped  in 
ten  feet  for  every  nine  in  height.  On  this  building  the  sun  can 
shine  upon  the  whole  of  it  twice  a  year  without  a  shadow. 
This  building  is  the  most  correctly  orient  of  any  structure  on 
the  earth.  It  is  the  highest,  largest,  and  oldest  building  on 
earth,  rising  to  the  height  of  486  feet  and  a  fraction,  which 


THE  STONE  WITNESS 


77 


height  if  multiplied  by  ten  nine  times  gives  the  distance  of  the 
earth  from  the  sun ;  or  pile  a  thousand  million  pyramids  one  on 
the  other,  and  the  last  would  touch  the  sun.  As  it  stood  perfect, 
it  was  the  circle  squared  ;  for  the  height  is  the  radius  of  a  circle, 
whose  circumference,  if  divided  into  four  equal  parts,  each 
part  would  equal  one  of  the  surface  sides  of  the  base— closer 
in  approximation  than  Walli’s  Indivisibles,  or  Newton’s  Flux¬ 
ions,  or  Liebnitz’s  Calculus.  The  door  of  entrance  was  some 
forty-nine  feet  from  its  base,  and  300  inches  East  of  the 
centre,  so  as  at  once  to  express  the  tilt  of  the  earth’s  axis  from 
the  plane  of  its  orbit,  and  by  its  height  from  the  ground  express 
the  Precession  of  the  Equinoxes.  What  a  witness  outwardly, 
when  complete,  of  polished  marble,  covering  some  thirteen 
and  a  half  acres,  within  and  without  clean  and  free  from  ido¬ 
latrous  marks.  But  God  foretold  the  place  and  purpose  of  his 
huge  pile  through  the  prophet  Isaiah  (xix.  19,  20)  :  “In  that 
day  shall  there  be  an  altar  to  the  Lord  in  the  midst  of  the  land 
of  Egypt,  and  a  pillar  at  the  border  thereof  to  the  Lord.  And 
it  shall  be  for  a  sign  and  for  a  witness  unto  the  Lord  of  hosts 
in  the  land  of  Egypt.”  Here  we  see  the  altar  and  pillar  are  one 
and  the  same,  and  a  scientific  fact  is  expressed  when  the 
prophet  says  it  shall  be  in  the  midst  and  on  the  border.  The 
position  of  the  Pyramid  is  such,  being  at  the  sector  point  of 
Upper  and  Lower  Egypt,  thus  being  on  the  border  of  both, 
yet  in  the  midst.  The  sector  point  of  the  arm  is  where  the  wrist 
joins  the  hand.  The  spreading  hand  represents  Lower,  and 
the  arm  Upper  Egypt.  (See  illustration  at  back  of  title). 

May  we  ask  what  the  pillar  and  witness — the  Pyramid — 
has  to  say  on  the  Jewish  question,  for  it  has  not  left  this  fact 
unnoticed?  At  the  junction  of  the  first  ascending  passage 
with  the  grand  gallery,  on  the  left-hand  side,  or  East,  there  is  a 
horizontal  passage-way  leading  to  what  is  called  the  queen’s 
chamber.  This  chamber  is  on  the  twenty-fifth  course  of 
masonry.  Now,  it  is  allowed,  the  grand  gallery  expresses  the 
time  of  Christ’s  advent  and  fulness  of  time — enlarged  liberty. 
The  ascending  passage  being  only  four  feet  high,  men  were 
cramped  in  passing  up,  but  on  reaching  the  grand  gallery  they 
were  free,  for  it  is  twenty-eight  feet  high. 

The  passage  to  the  queen’s  chamber  is  only  four  feet,  and 
is  it  not  strange  that  it  is  altogether  Jewish?  This  low  hori¬ 
zontal  passage  terminates  in  a  grand  Sabbatic  room,  which 
symbolises  the  Jewish  Sabbath-week,  feasts,  and  time  periods. 

From  this  passage  we  learn  that  the  Jews  rejected  Christ, 
and  went  off  by  themselves,  refusing  the  Liberty  of  Christ. 
So  as  truly  as  the  coming  of  Christ  had  been  forecast  in  this 
Pyramid,  so  had  His  rejection  by  the  Jews. 

The  very  mortar  in  this  chamber  is  mixed  with  salt.  The 
chamber  is  seven-sided.  The  last  seventh  of  the  passage-way 
sinks  down,  giving  more  room  to  move  in.  Salt  was  an  article 
used  freely  with  the  Jews  in  sacrificing.  Seven  was  a  sacred 
number.  The  sinking  of  the  last  seventh  part  of  the  passage- 


78 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


way  floor  may  mean  the  enlarging  privilege  of  the  Jews  in  this 
latter  day.  Of  the  civilised  nations,  only  Russia  and  Spain 
forbid  them  citizenship.  Even  Turkey  admits  them  now  as 
citizens. 

The  Jews  have  been  represented  as  being  blind  in  part. 
The  passage-way  and  chamber  have  been  difficult  to  explore 
because  of  foul  air,  there  being  no  ventilating  tubes  as  in  the 
king’s  chamber. 

But,  strange  to  say,  a  gentleman  exploring  this  chamber  a 
short  time  ago,  found  two  tubes  by  an  accident  in  striking  the 
side  wall  with  a  hammer.  The  tubes  had  been  left  entirely 
closed  over  with  a  thin  unbroken  scale.  These  tubes  extended 
inward  through  the  masonry,  and  into  the  stones  forming  the 
walls  of  the  room,  all  nicely  cut,  but  for  about  one  inch  they 
were  not  cut  through  into  the  room  itself.  Thus  the  whole  was 
designed  is  evident.  This  thin  scale  no  doubt  symbolises  the 
condition  of  the  Jew.  His  eyes  are  now  open,  the  time  of  his 
wandering  nearly  spent,  as  told  by  this  Pyramid. 

The  curses  foretold  upon  the  Jew  have  been  terribly  ful¬ 
filled.  So  shall  the  blessings  foretold  now  in  reserve.  It  was 
foretold  that  he  would  reject  Christ;  so  he  did.  But  it  is  also 
foretold  that  he  will  yet  look  upon  Him  whom  he  pierced,  and 
mourn  and  repent,  and  accept  the  true  Messiah.  Lo-ruhamah 
represents  lost  Israel;  Lo-ammi  represents  cursed  Judah; 
Ruhamah  represents  Israel  found ;  Ammi  represents  the  curse 
removed  from  the  Jews.  So  now  we  must  say  as  the  prophet 
Hosea  long  ago  instructed  us — we  Saxons — “Say  ye  unto 
your  brethren,  Ammi,  and  you  Jews  say  to  your  sisters,  Ru¬ 
hamah.” 

We  have  esteemed  the  Jews  as  cursed;  we  will  soon  esteem 
them  blest.  The  Jews  have  never  thought  we  were  their 
brethren,  the  descendants  of  Abraham.  But  God  is  revealing 
in  this  latter  day  His  own  great  plan ;  and  Christ  will  be  the 
Saviour  of  both. 

“In  His  days  Judah  shall  be  saved,  and  Israel  shall  dwell 
safely.  Therefore,  behold,  the  days  come,  saith  the  Lord,  that 
they  shall  no  more  say,  The  Lord  liveth,  which  brought  up  the 
children  of  Israel  out  of  Egypt;  but,  The  Lord  liveth,  which 
brought  up,  and  which  led  the  seed  of  the  house  of  Israel  out 
of  the  North  country,  and  from  all  countries  whither  I  had 
driven  them;  and  they  shall  dwell  in  their  own  land”  (ler. 
xxiii.  6 — 8). 

Glorious  times  are  near  at  hand  for  the  Church  and  the 
world.  Great  things  hath  God  promised,  all  of  which  He  will 
in  His  own  good  time  bring  to  pass. 

The  very  dimensions  of  the  door-way  are  of  thrilling  import, 
expressing  in  square  inches  the  time  of  the  Adamic  world, 
which,  when  added  to  other  figures,  forecast  the  time  of  the 
end,  or  the  6,000  years,  and  point  out  the  date  of  the  be¬ 
ginning  of  the  Millennium  morn,  or  Sabbath  of  the  earth — 
the  period  spoken  of  by  Daniel  when  he  says,  “Blessed  is 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS 


79 


he  that  waiteth,  and  cometh  to  the  thousand  three  hundred 
and  five  and  thirty  days.”  This  period  we  approximated  in 
our  last  discourse,  and  made  it  out  to  be  about  1,957.  The 
door-way  in  square  inches  is  1,949  ;  take  these  inches  for  years, 
and  we  have,  before  the  building  of  the  Pyramid,  of  years 
1,949  a.m.,  time  of  building  2,170  b.c.  and  length  of  grand 
gallery  1882,  and  we  get  a  total  of  6,001.  This  is  indeed  a 
close  approximation. 


Discourse  XIV. — Signs  and  Wonders. 

The  Stone  Prophet  in  the  Wilderness — No  War  for  Four 
Years — The  Great  Struggle  to  Commence  in  1882 — 
Prussia  Ancient  Assyria — England,  Germany,  and  Egypt 
to  he  Allies — The  Future  History  of  the  World — The 
Philistines  the  Southern  Irish — Who  their  Great  Ances¬ 
tor  Was,  etc. 

“The  great,  the  mighty  God,  the  Lord  of  hosts,  is  His  name.  Great 
in  counsel,  and  mighty  in  work;  for  Thine  eyes  are  open  upon  all  the 
ways  of  the  sons  of  men;  to  give  every  one  according  to  his  ways, 
and  according  to  the  fruit  of  his  doings;  which  has  set  signs  and 
wonders  in  the  land  of  Egypt,  even  unto  this  day.” — Jer.  xxxii.  18 
—20. 


Egypt  is  intimately  connected  with  Palestine  in  providential 
history,  both  past,  present,  and  future.  No  student  can  have  a 
proper  knowledge  of  the  Jewish  and  Israelitish  nation  unless 
he  be  familiar  with  the  early  civilisation  and  power  of  Egypt. 
From  this  land  went  forth  the  Caphtorim  to  settle  Palestine, 
led  forth  by  the  great  and  good  Melchisedek,  after  he  had  built 
the  Pyramid.  Under  his  reign  they  first  settled  Palestine,  built 
and  made  Jerusalem  their  capitol.  On  the  death  of  Melchise¬ 
dek  they  lost  their  allegiance  to  God,  they  became  an  idola¬ 
trous  people,  and  were  rejected  by  Jehovah  as  His  special 
agents.  They  are  known  in  after  history  under  the  name  of 
Philistines,  which  simply  means  the  followers  or  subjects  of 
Philitis — a  name  which  the  early  historians  of  Egypt  gave  to 
the  builder  of  the  Pyramid,  which  was  none  other  person  than 
Melchisedek.  By  the  Israelites  they  were  driven  out  of  Pales¬ 
tine,  and  finally  settled  in  the  South  of  Ireland,  as  Irish  his¬ 
torians  allow. 

Another  member  of  the  family  of  Shem  was  called — namely, 
Abraham,  from  whom  came  God’s  chosen  people— Israel  and 
the  Jews.  They  also  had  to  sojourn  in  Egypt,  and  they,  too, 
were  sent  to  Palestine,  and  grafted  on  to  the  purpose  of  God, 
where  the  Philistines  had  been  broken  off. 


80 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


“Have  not  I  brought  up  Israel  out  of  the  land  of  Egypt, 
and  the  Philistines  from  Caphtor?”  (Amos.  ix.  7). 

Egypt  has  played  a  noble  part  in  the  providence  of  God 
through  Melchisedek,  Abraham,  Joseph,  and  Moses.  Even  the 
blessed  Jesus  is  said  to  be  called  from  this  land.  “Out  of 
Egypt  have  I  called  My  Son.”  The  Egyptians  gave  to  the 
world  the  first  translation  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  and  it  was  for 
centuries  the  stronghold  of  Christianity  after  the  destruction  of 
Jerusalem.  The  best  of  the  Christian  fathers  were  Egyptians, 
and  in  the  coming  struggle,  the  great  war,  which  will  come 
later  on,  again  Egypt  will  become  conspicuous  with  England 
and  Germany.  For  the  Germans  are  the  Assyrians  as  the 
English  are  the  Lost  Tribes  of  Israel.  The  Kaiser  may  ma¬ 
noeuvre  as  he  pleases,  and  he  as  pro-Russian  as  he  wishes,  yet 
when  the  time  comes  he  and  his  people  will  fall  in  with  the 
providential  purpose,  and  become  an  ally  with  Israel-England : 
and  timid  and  bankrupt  Egypt  will  then  come  forth  to  take 
her  place  once  more  among  the  nations  of  the  earth  as  an  inde¬ 
pendent  Power.  Hear  what  the  prophet  Isaiah  says  in  chap, 
xix. :  “And  the  Lord  shall  smite  Egypt,  He  shall  smite  and 
heal  it,  and  they  shall  return  even  to  the  Lord,  and  He  shall  be 
entreated  of  them,  and  shall  heal  them.  In  that  day  shall  there 
be  a  highway  out  of  Egypt  to  Assyria,  and  the  Assyrian  shall 
come  into  Egypt  and  the  Egyptian  in  to  Assyria,  and  the 
Egyptians  shall  serve  with  the  Assyrians.  In  that  day  shall 
Israel  be  the  third  with  Egypt  and  with  Assyria,  even  a  blessing 
in  the  midst  of  the  land,  whom  the  Lord  of  hosts  shall  bless, 
saying,  Blessed  be  Egypt  My  people,  and  Assyria  the  work  of 
My  hands,  and  Israel  Mine  inheritance.” 

“In  that  day”  refers  to  this  day,  now  at  hand.  To  this  the 
Great  Pyramid  is  witness.  For  in  verses  19  and  20  of  this 
chapter  we  read :  “In  that  day  shall  there  be  an  altar  to  the 
Lord  in  the  midst  of  the  land  of  Egypt,  and  a  pillar  at  the 
border  thereof  to  the  Lord.  And  it  shall  be  for  a  sign  and  for 
a  witness  unto  the  Lord  of  hosts  in  the  land  of  Egypt.” 

The  word  translated  pillar  is  from  the  Hebrew  word  Mat- 
zaybhah,  and  means  a  large  structure — some  monument  that  is 
pre-eminent.  The  Hebrew  word  Ammood  is  translated  pillar 
also,  and  corresponds  to  the  English  word  pillar  much  better. 

The  word  altar,  in  Hebrew,  means  lion,  carrying  with  it  the 
same  meaning  of  pre-eminence.  And  is  not  this  Pyramid  pre¬ 
eminent?  and  is  it  not  the  lion  of  monuments,  pre-eminent  as 
being  the  oldest,  pre-eminent  as  being  the  highest,  pre-eminent 
as  being  the  largest,  pre-eminent  in  location — being  central  to 
all  the  land  surface  of  the  earth,  pre-eminent  in  construction, 
unlike  any  other  buildings,  except  such  as  have  been  modelled 
after  it,  pre-eminent  in  orientation — that  is  being  exactly  East, 
North,  West,  and  South. 

Perfect  orientation  men  in  past  ages  and  countries  have  tried 
to  express  in  temples,  churches,  observatories,  and  monuments, 
yet  none  have  succeeded  so  well  as  the  Pyramid  builders. 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS 


81 


The  famous  Uranibourg  Observatory,  built  by  aid  of  the 
European  Governments,  under  the  skilful  supervision  of  the 
learned  Tycho  Brahe,  was  found  to  be  five  minutes  of  a  degree 
askew  in  its  orientation  when  finished. 

A  few  years  ago  our  Government  determined  to  have  one 
perfect  point  of  orientation,  fixing  upon  Mount  Agamenticus 
in  the  State  of  Maine.  They,  at  a  great  cost,  and  time  and 
labour,  concluded  their  work,  and  found  they  were  in  error 
somewhere  about  the  four-hundredth  part  of  a  second;  al¬ 
though  they  tried  to  solve  the  problem  by  three  distinct  pro¬ 
cesses — namely,  differences  of  zenith  distance,  absolute  zenith 
distances,  and  by  transits  in  prime  vertical. 

How  then  came  these  ancient  architects  so  early  in  the 
world’s  history  and  progress  to  build  so  skilfully?  How  were 
they  able  some  4,000  years  ago  to  find  the  poles,  and  determine 
the  latitude  and  longtitude  so  precisely?  Answer,  ye  godless 
scientists,  and  tell  us  how  these  monkey  men  were  so  skilled. 
How  did  they  know  without  your  instruments  and  instruction 
which  parallel  of  latitude  to  choose  so  as  to  be  on  that  line 
which  would  mark  the  half-way  of  the  world’s  surface  between 
the  equator  and  the  poles? 

And  why  did  they  lay  bare  and  make  smooth  the  lime-stone 
table  rock  on  which  they  built  close  to  its  Northern  edge? 
Why  press  so  closely  to  the  brink  of  the  hill  on  the  North  side 
when  there  was  plenty  of  room  on  the  South  side? 

Truly  this  witness  of  God  is  against  you.  In  this  building 
are  “signs  and  wonders”  even  to  this  day,  and  as  surely  also 
are  the  eyes  of  Jehovah  open  upon  all  the  ways  of  the  children 
of  men. 

Know  ye  not  that  the  accumulated  forces  and  results  of 
centuries  have  been  bequeathed  to  the  present  generation  as  a 
legal  heritage  for  culture  and  profit? 

Happily  for  us  God  has  not  left  Himself  without  witnesses. 
Long  before  God  made  bare  His  arm  through  Moses,  and 
wrought  miracles  to  convince  Pharaoh  and  the  Egyptians,  He 
had  wrought  one  miracle,  a  miracle  which  would  cover  the 
ages ;  not  to  be  seen  by  a  few  only,  or  last  for  a  day,  but  to  be 
seen  by  millions  and  last  for  centuries. 

In  this  Pyramid  we  have  a  valuable  inheritance.  Its  finish, 
its  beauty,  its  magnitude  provokes  our  criticism  and  yet  must 
command  our  admiration.  This  watchman  on  the  walls  of 
time,  this  sentinel  in  charge  of  the  secrets  and  treasures  of 
the  sires  of  long  ago,  this  prophet  in  the  wilderness  in  rugged 
garb,  proclaiming  the  will  of  Heaven,  as  then  made  known,  and 
now  manifest,  this  Daniel  who  can  interpret  for  us  the  future, 
this  mile-stone  of  the  ages,  we  do  revere. 

By  it  we  are  enabled  to  adjust  our  chronological  dates,  rec¬ 
tify  history  in  some  of  its  most  important  points,  and  judge 
more  correctly  of  the  attainments  of  our  ancestors;  nay,  more 
and  better,  to  form  a  truer  estimate  of  ourselves  and  discern 
the  finger  of  God  in  the  manipulations  of  men,  and  an  o\er- 


82 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


ruling  Providence  in  the  rise  and  fall  of  nations. 

These  signs  and  wonders  confirm  God’s  Word,  for  they 
prove  inspiration  a  fact ;  inspiration  of  a  kind  and  in  the  very 
manner  demanded  by  the  unbelieving  scientists.  Here  is  a 
building  superhuman,  and  of  course  in  part  supernatural,  like 
the  Bible.  In  this  building  the  human  and  the  Divine  blend. 

If  any  deny  this  it  remains  with  them  to  account  for  it,  and 
show  how  a  people  so  far  back  in  the  world’s  history  could  be 
so  wise  and  learned ;  how  they  could  embody  so  much  of  the 
sciences.  One  thing  is  certain,  if  the  Divine  had  nothing  to 
do  with  this  building,  then  we  are  left  to  the  conclusion  that 
man  was  much  superior  to  what  the  Darwinian  theory  admits. 
If  void  of  the  Divine,  then  the  development  theory  is  de¬ 
stroyed.  If  we  admit  the  Divine,  then  it  follows  that  inspira¬ 
tion  is  a  fact. 

The  building  is  there,  and  it  was  there  in  the  day  of  Egypt’s 
oldest  historians.  It  has  been  counted  as  one  of  the  seven 
wonders  of  the  world. 

It  did  not  embody  the  ideas  of  the  Egyptians  in  science, 
astronomy,  metrology,  or  religion.  As  their  historians  allow, 
it  was  built  by  foreigners  which  they  hated. 

Nothing  idolatrous  was  carved  on  it,  within  or  without.  It 
was  a  witness  pure  and  clean.  The  Egyptians  proclaimed  and 
believed  the  earth  to  be  square — this  building  proclaimed  the 
earth  round.  The  builders  bevelled  the  face  of  the  rock  in  a 
ratio  of  eight  inches  to  the  mile — the  very  quantity  that  science 
to-day  admits  to  be  the  curvature  of  the  earth — and  accepts  in 
surveying.  It  was  their  knowledge  of  this  fact  that  kept  the 
building  sound,  without  the  cracking  of  a  joint,  through  cen¬ 
turies,  though  so  high.  The  Egyptians  did  not  use  the  sacred 
amma,  or  cubit,  which  is  about  twenty- five  of  our  inches.  They 
used  a  profane  cubit,  as  Sir  Isaac  Newton  shows. 

This  sacred  cubit  was  a  well  and  easily  established  propor¬ 
tion  of  the  earth’s  diameter — the  very  standard  now  used  by 
the  English  Government  in  surveying. 

The  stones  of  the  Pyramid  were  twelve  feet  long,  eight  feet 
broad,  and  five  deep,  making  twenty-five  total.  The  building 
itself  was  a  five-faced  figure.  The  Egyptians  hated  five.  No 
wonder  that  Moses  harnessed  the  Israelites  in  fives  as  they  left 
Egypt,  or  that  he  should  divide  his  book  into  five  parts. 

No  wonder  that  the  queen’s  chamber  should  be  on  the 
twenty-fifth  course  of  masonry,  and  the  king’s  chamber  on  the 
fiftieth  course,  which  is  the  year  of  jubilee,  or  deliverance — 
which  year,  as  indicated  in  the  Pyramid,  is  the  year  1935. 

The  Egyptians  calculated  from  the  moon  in  their  chronol¬ 
ogy.  But  this  building  takes  its  calculations  from  the  sun 
circle.  The  Egyptian  year  was  354  days,  with  an  intercalary 
month  of  thirty-three  days  added  every  three  years. 

The  year  embodied  in  the  Pyramid  was  365  days,  five  hours, 
forty-eight  minutes,  forty-seven  and  seven-tenths  seconds. 
If  a  person  took  a  rod  of  a  cubit  length,  and  measured  one  of 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS 


83 


the  base  sides  of  the  Pyramid,  he  would  find  this  twenty-five 
inch  measure  to  be  contained  as  often  as  there  are  days  in  the 
year,  with  the  same  fraction  in  inches  as  the  hours,  minutes,  and 
seconds. 

Is  it  impious  to  ask  how  these  builders  knew  the  solar  year 
so  completely?  They  knew  the  sun’s  circle  of  448  years,  which 
completes  a  circle  of  time  without  any  excess  or  deficiency. 
This  they  ran  into  weights  and  measures  as  God  s  religion 

does.  _  .... 

The  Pyramid  having  four  sides,  would  divide  this  circle  into 
four  parts,  which  makes  112  pounds  or  a  hundred-weight,  or, 
if  multiplied  by  five,  the  faces  of  the  Pyramid,  448  would  give 


2,249,  or  a  ton. 

In  the  descending  and  ascending  passages  a  person  must 
stoop  to  pass  through  them,  but  when  the  grand  gallery  is 
reached  they  can  stand  upright,  for  this  gallery  enlarges  seven 
times  the  proportions  of  the  others.  The  first  passages  are 
only  four  feet  high,  this  is  twenty-eight. 

The  first  ascending  passage  is  1,542  inches  m  length— the 
time,  taking  inches  for  years,  from  the  exodus  of  Israel  from 
Egypt  to  Christ. 

Christ  brings  enlarged  liberty.  He  was  symbolised  by  the 
ton— the  end  of  weight  scale.  “When  the  fulness  of  time  was 

come,  God  sent  forth  His  Son.”  # 

Again,  thirty-three  inches  in  this  gallery  is  an  open  sepulchre 
with  fifty-six  empty  graves  in  miniature,  carved  out,  telling, 
again,  by  a  strange  coincident,  the  life  years  of  the  Saviour  and 
His  resurrection,  also  the  number  of  those  who  rose  immedi¬ 
ately  after.  For  “the  graves  were  opened,  and  many  bodies  ot 
the  saints  which  slept,  arose  and  came  out  of  the  graves  after 

His  resurrection”  (Matt,  xxvii.  52).  . 

Another  remarkable  feature  is,  that  at  the  end  of  this  ga  ery, 
the  wall  bulges  forward  about  four  inches,  as  if  it  were  going 
to  fall  in.  This  gallery,  on  the  floor,  is  1,882  inches;  on  the 
roof  1,878  inches.  This  explains  to  us  our  very  times  Ihe 
shadow  of  war— Russia  and  England  appearing  as  if  they 
would  fight  every  day.  But  they  knew  not  the  counsels  of 
God  nor  His  sublime  purpose.  Surely,  as  the  text  declares, 
“Our  God  is  great  in  counsel  and  mighty  in  work and  his 
eyes  are  open  upon  all  the  ways  of  the  sons  of  men.  11ore 
next  Sunday  evening, _  God  willing,  about  His  own  marvellous 
witnesses.  Let  us  praise  and  adore  Him. 


84 


Discourse  XV. — The  Throne  of  David. 

England’s  Prophecy  Fulfilled  in  the  Berlin  Congress — The 
Harp  of  Tara  the  Harp  of  Israel — The  Future  European 
Alliances — Royal  Succession  of  the  House  of  Israel. 

“I  will  overturn,  overturn,  overturn  it;  it  shall  be  no  more,  until 
He  come  whose  right  it  is;  and  I  will  give  it  Him.” — Ezekiel  xxi.  27. 

The  closing  of  the  famous  European  Congress  will  now  freely 
permit  us  to  canvass  the  work  and  results  of  the  same,  and  to 
compare  the  sequences  with  the  teachings  of  the  prophets  and 
intentions  of  Providence.  The  results  of  the  Congress  have 
taken  the  world  by  surprise.  The  very  fact  that  one  should 
have  been  held  under  the  enforced  conditions  of  the  crownless 
king,  Disraeli,  was  a  wonder  in  itself.  But  the  wonder  is  not 
confined  to  the  meeting  and  work  of  the  Congress,  for  outside 
of,  and  in  spite  of,  the  Congress,  a  treaty  had  been  made  which 
converts  wonder  into  amazement.  In  the  middle  of  May,  1878, 
England  and  Turkey  formed  an  alliance,  offensive  and  defen¬ 
sive.  Nay,  more,  for  Turkey  ceded  to  England  the  fruitful 
and  strategic  island  of  Cyprus.  What  a  triangle  of  strongholds 
— Cyprus,  Malta  and  Gibraltar.  Shades  of  Bonaparte  !  Where 
was  France  in  those  days?  She  was  renewing  her  strength, 
and  wisely  standing  aside  so  as  not  to  oppose  Providence.  In 
all  this  there  is  nothing  new  or  strange  to  the  prophetic  stu¬ 
dent.  For  long  ago  it  was  written  of  Israel  that  she  should  be 
a  company  of  nations,  and  possess  the  gates  of  her  enemies. 

It  is  not  by  might,  nor  power  of  human  origin,  that  these 
events  must  be  judged,  or  that  they  come  to  pass.  But  surely 
by  the  Spirit  of  God.  “There  is  a  spirit  in  man,  and  the  in¬ 
spiration  of  the  Almighty  giveth  it  understanding.”  Here  Job 
gives  us  the  key  to  unlock  the  mysteries  of  the  crownless 
king  and  his  success.  The  apothegm  of  Bonaparte  is  as  false 
as  he  was  unsuccessful — namely,  that  Providence  is  always  on 
the  side  of  the  strongest  battalions.  In  Israel,  in  time  of  old, 
this  was  seldom  true.  In  fact,  it  was  not  true  to  the  experience 
and  campaigns  of  Bonaparte.  The  hope  of  such  a  faith  has 
been  the  ruin  of  lovely  France  more  than  once,  and  will  be 
again. 

When  we  received  the  astounding  telegram  of  the  treaty 
between  England  and  Turkey,  it  evidently  came  as  a  surprise. 
“Now,  again,  England  pledges  herself  a  Continental  Power, 
nay,  more,  an  Asiatic  Power.  She  will  come  forth  from  the 
Congress  the  virtual  ruler  of  Turkey,  the  owner  of  Palestine.” 

If  the  Saxons  be  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes  of  Israel — and  most 
certainly  they  respond  to  all  the  features  that  were  to  distinctly 
mark  them  when  found,  as  written  in  the  Bible — then  the 
English  throne  is  a  continuation  of  David’s  throne,  and  the 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID 


85 


seed  on  it  must  be  the  seed  of  David,  and  the  inference  is  clear 
— namely,  that  all  the  blessings  attaching  by  Holy  promise  to 
David’s  throne  must  belong  to  England.  This  is  the  key  that 
unravels  and  makes  plain  the  marvellous  and  sublime  history 
of  the  English  nation  and  throne.  We  know  many  scout  the 
idea  of  the  Lost  Tribes  ever  being  found,  although  over  thirty 
times  God  declares  by  the  prophets  that  they  must  return ; 
surely  before  they  return  they  must  be  found.  God  has  not 
cast  away  His  people  for  ever.  No,  no.  He  declares  Israel  to 
be  His  inheritance,  and  that  this  people  He  had  formed  for 


Himself. 

The  Two  Tribes  forming  the  Jews  of  to-day  are  said  by  the 
best  calculations  to  number  about  ten  millions.  If,  then,  the 
Two  Tribes  number  ten  millions,  how  many  ought  we  to  ex¬ 
pect  the  Ten  Tribes  to  number?  If  the  Two  Tribes  have  stood 
and  survived  the  shock  and  persecution  of  centuries  when 
known,  and  therefore  open  to  assault,  is  it  not  reasonable  to 
suppose  that  the  Ten  d  ribes  will  be  in  existence,  a  numerous 
and  powerful  people,  for  they  have  been  hid,  and  thus  have 
they  evaded  the  persecution  that  a  knowledge  of  their  .nation¬ 
ality  would  have  entailed  upon  them  from  the  Gentile  and 
Pagan  nations  ? 

Some,  indeed,  persist  in  looking  for  God’s  chosen  seed  His 
people,  His  inheritance— among  the  bushmen  of  Africa,  the 
Indians  of  America;  indeed  wherever  they  can  find  a  people 
mean,  and  few,  and  very  low  in  the  scale  of  civilisation.  They 
overlook  the  fact  that  Israel,  not  the  Jews,  were  to  be  the  most 
powerful  and  prolific  people  on  the  face  of  the  earth,  to  be  as 
sands  of  the  sea,  as  the  stars  of  heaven.  Especially  were 
these  promises  to  be  true  in  the  latter  day— for  then  God 
promises  to  multiply  them,  men,  beasts,  and  the  fruits  of  the 
field  This  is  one  of  the  signs  of  the  times,  and  it  is  a  remark¬ 
able  one.  See  our  harvest,  see  our  cattle,  and  see  the  Saxon 
race — doubling,  at  least,  every  forty  years.  No  other  nation  is 
doubling  at  that  rate.  Germany  comes  the  nearest,  and  both 
in  Prussia  and  Austria  they  only  double  every  one  hunored 
years.  In  one  hundred  years  from  to-day  the  Saxons  will  con¬ 
trol  the  world  for  peace  and  Christ. 

To  this  end  God  is  overturning,  and  will  overturn  until  the 
whole  world  shall  be  federated  around  one  throne,  and  that 
throne  is  David’s— the  only  throne  God  ever  directly  estab¬ 
lished,  and  the  only  one  He  has  promised  perpetuity  to.  God 
has  a  land— Palestine.  He  has  a  people— Israel  He  has  a 
throne — David’s,  and  for  that  throne  He  has  a  seed,  just  as  the 
seed  of  Levi  was  selected  for  Temple  service.  _ 

This  kingdom  is  the  fifth  kingdom,  to  be  set  up  m  the  latter 
days  of  those  kings,  says  Daniel.  The  kingdom  was  never  to 
be  left  unto  other  people.  It  is  typified  by  the  stone  cut  out  of 
the  mountain  that  is  to  fill  the  world.  Why  then  stand  amazed 
at  the  cession  of  Cyprus  to  England  if  she  be  Israel .  To  her 
was  promised  the  isles  of  the  sea,  the  coasts  of  the  earth,  the 


86 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


waste  and  desolate  places — the  heathen  and  uttermost  parts  of 
the  earth,  as  a  possession.  Already  out  of  the  fifty-one  million 
square  miles  which  compose  the  earth,  England,  including 
the  United  States  (Manasseh),  now  owns  about  fourteen  mil¬ 
lions,  or  say  one-fourth.  She  bears  rule  over  one-third  of 
the  people  of  the  earth ;  she  adds  a  colony  every  four  years  on 
an  average.  At  the  present  rate  it  will  not  be  long  before  the 
kingdoms  of  this  world  will  be  given  to  the  saints  of  the  Most 
High.  It  is  no  marvel  in  the  light  and  instruction  of  prophecy 
that  this  throne  and  people  should  be  so  stable  and  prosperous. 

Turn  your  attention  to  the  founding  of  this  throne  of  David. 
You  will  find  the  throne  and  seed  unconditionally  federated, 
the  place  and  measure  of  prosperity  conditioned  on  the  obedi¬ 
ence  of  the  people  and  throne  to  God.  “The  Lord  hath  sworn 
in  truth  unto  David;  He  will  not  turn  from  it;  of  the  fruit  of 
thy  body  will  I  set  upon  thy  throne”  (Psalm  cxxxii.  11). 
Again,  “I  have  sworn  unto  David,  thy  seed  I  will  establish  for 
ever,  and  build  up  thy  throne  to  all  generations”  (Psalm 
lxxxix.  3,  4).  This  promise  is  to  all  generations — not  a  part, 
nor  simply  for  sixty  years.  For  the  kingdom  was  rent  in  twain 
when  Rehoboam,  the  grandson  of  David,  began  to  reign.  The 
throne  of  David  would  be  about  the  poorest  type  of  Christ’s 
throne,  and  rule,  and  reign,  if  we  can  only  see  it  in  Palestine. 
There  it  was  soon  divided,  very  corrupt.  “If  ye  can  break  My 
covenant  of  the  day  and  night  in  their  season,  then  may  also 
My  covenant  be  broken  with  David  My  servant,  that  he  should 

not  have  a  son  to  reign  upon  his  throne . Thus  saith  the 

Lord:  If  My  covenant  be  not  with  day  and  night,  and  if  I 
have  not  appointed  the  ordinances  of  heaven  and  earth,  then 
will  I  cast  away  the  seed  of  Jacob  and  David  My  servant,  so 
that  I  will  not  take  any  of  his  seed  to  be  rulers  over  the  seed  of 
Abraham”  (Jer.  xxxiii.  25,  26).  Let  anybody  of  the  same 
mind  read  the  seventh  chapter  of  the  second  book  of  Samuel, 
and  they  will  see  that  God  promised  to  David  that  his  house 
and  kingdom  should  be  established  for  ever,  and  that  God 
would  set  up  the  seed  of  David  after  him.  Well  might  David 
exclaim  when  he  sat  before  the  Lord,  “Who  am  I,  O  Lord  God, 
and  what  is  my  house,  that  Thou  hast  brought  me  hitherto? 
And  this  was  yet  a  small  thing  in  Thy  sight,  O  Lord  God ;  but 
Thou  hast  spoken  also  of  Thy  servant’s  house  for  a  great  while 
to  come.”  It  is  a  pity  men  will  not  take  and  interpret  the  Bible 
by  the  rules  of  common-sense. 

David  at  this  time  was  king  over  all  the  tribes  and  was  at 
peace,  and  settled  and  prospered.  But  God  told  him  that  “He 
would  appoint  a  place  for  My  people  Israel,  and  will  plant 
them  that  they  may  dwell  in  a  place -of  their  own  and  move  no 
more.”  This  promise  was  to  Israel.  If  the  promises  of  the 
multitudinous  seed  were  to  be  fulfilled  to  Israel,  then  it  would 
be  necessary  to  find  them  another  place,  for  Palestine  wouldn’t 
hold  them.  So  God  has  planted  them.  God  never  promised 
to  find  the  Jews  another  country;  Palestine  is  specially  re- 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID 


87 


served  for  them.  They  have  been  without  country,  king  or 
government.  In  the  year  725  b.c.  the  Jews  and  Israelites  were 
separated,  and  since  that  time  they  have  never  been  united. 
But  the  day  is  coming,  says  the  prophet,  when  they  shall  dwell 
together  and  appoint  one  head  over  them.  The  Israelites  are 
only  to  return  to  Palestine  representatively  (Jer.  iii.  14). 

When  Nebuchadnezzar  carried  the  Jews  captive,  he  took  the 
king  Zedekiah  with  him,  and  destroyed  all  his  family,  and  all 
the  real  royal  seed  of  David.  Zedekiah  died  in  Babylon.  He 
placed  upon  the  throne  of  David,  Gedaliah.  Now  Gedaliah  was 
not  of  the  seed  royal:  but  God  was  displeased  and  permitted 
the  crown  to  go  to  others.  Ezekiel  was  taken  captive  to  Baby¬ 
lon  in  the  reign  of  Jehoiachim,  the  father  of  Zedekiah.  dhe 
prophecy  of  the  text  was  written  in  Babylon  and  refers  to 
Zedekiah  whom  Ezekiel  calls  the  “wicked  Prince  of  Israel, 
whose  day  is  come,  iniquity  shall  have  an  end.  Thus  saith  the 
Lord  God,  remove  the  diadem  and  take  off  the  crown,  this  shall 
not  be  the  same ;  exalt  him  that  is  low,  and  abase  him  that  is 
high.  I  will  overturn,  overturn,  overturn  it,  and  it  shall  be 
no  more  until  He  come  whose  right  it  is ;  and  I  will  give  it 
to  Him.” 

Now  all  this  is  plain  if  we  keep  in  mind  that  Zedekiah  was 
the  last  prince  of  the  house  of  David  that  ever  reigned  in 
Palestine.  God  removed  the  diadem.  But  in  the  course  of 
time  a  lawful  heir  of  the  seed  of  David  shall  appear,  and  the 
throne  and  the  seed  will  be  established  again  in  Jerusalem.  It 
is  to  this  end  Providence  is  overturning  Turkey  to  make  way 
for  this  seed  royal.  But  where  is  this  seed  royal  ?  Answer : 
It  is  on  the  English  throne.  Listen  carefully  to  the  following: 

Jeremiah  tells  us  that  with  him  he  had  the  daughters  of 
Zedekiah,  who  had  by  some  means  escaped  the  destroying 
edicts  of  Nebuchadnezzar  (Jer.  xliii.  6).  And  from  Jer.  xliv. 
14,  we  learn  that  they  visited  Egypt,  and  from  Jer.  xliv.  28,  we 
learn  that  a  small  number  escaped.  Now  Jeremiah  being  the 
only  prophet  in  Judah  at  that  time,  had  a  right  to  take  charge 
of  the  royal  seed.  He  could  not  stay  in  Egypt,  nor  in  Pales¬ 
tine,  nor  would  he  go  to  Babylon.  Where,  then,,  did  the 
prophet  g'o  ?  He  no  doubt  took  ship  with  the  Danites,  and 
sailed  for  Cornwall,  in  England,  for  this  place  was  called 
Tarshish.  We  learn  from  Ezekiel  the  ships  of  Dan  traded  in 
tin  and  other  things.  History  and  tradition  both  agree  that 
there  landed  on  the  coast  of  Ireland  in  the  North,  a  divine 
man  and  a  Princess.  God  had  promised  to  Jeremiah  his  life 
wherever  he  went.  “But  thy  life  will  I  give  thee  for  a  prey  in 
all  places  whither  thou  goest”  (Jer.  xlv.  5). 

The  North  of  Ireland  had  been  settled  with  the  Tribe  of 
Dan;  they  at  once  understood  who  their  visitor  was.  They 
called  him  Olam  Fodla,  meaning  a  divine  man  or  teacher.  The 
princess  was  called  Tea  Tephi,  the  beautiful  one  from  the 
East.  This  princess  was  married  to  Heremon,  of  Ulster,  the 
king  of  Lothair  Croffin,  for  such  was  the  name  of  the  city  of 


88 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


Jacob’s  Stone. 


Tara.  Lothair  Croffin  was  changed  into  Tara  at  the  time  of 
the  wedding.  Tara  means  law.  Thus  began  the  seed  of  David 
to  take  root,  and  from  there  it  spread  over  all  Ireland,  then  to 
Scotland,  thence  to  England,  and  Jacob’s  Stone  in  West¬ 
minster  Abbey  marks  the  journey  of  David’s  throne,  and  has 
always  kept  with  the  seed,  and  they  have  been  always  crowned 
on  it.  Ezekiel’s  riddle  is  at  once  solved.  The  tender  twigs 
were  Zedekiah’s  daughters.  One  of  these  twigs  was  planted 
by  the  great  waters  in  a  land  of  traffic.  Our  Episcopalian 
friends  intended  by  their  beautiful  service  to  aid  the  members 
of  their  communion  to  read  in  order,  and  through  the  Bible,  or 
a  given  portion  of  each  chapter,  once  per  year.  But  strange  to 
say,  this  17th  chapter  of  Ezekiel,  they  have  left  out  both  of  the 
Old  and  New  Lectionary.  It  is  itself  a  riddle,  why  this  should 
so  happen,  that  the  only  two  chapters  of  the  Bible  left  out  or 
prescribed  are  the  17th  and  21st  of  Ezekiel ;  surely  blindness  in 
part  has  happened  to  Israel,  and  what  we  esteemed  as  acci¬ 
dental  in  the  increased  light  of  Revelation,  stands  to  view  as 
the  ordered  purposes  of  an  all-seeing  God. 

The  royal  standard  of  England  has  nine  lions  on  it,  and  a 
unicorn.  Let  anyone  set  this  standard  before  him  as  a  map, 
the  right  hand  will  represent  East,  the  top  North,  left  West,  the 
bottom  South.  The  unicorn  comes  from  the  East,  it  has  a 
chain  around  its  neck.  So  the  Tribe  of  Benjamin  came  that 
way,  and,  as  Normans,  were  finally  attached  to  the  throne. 
The  big  lion  comes  from  the  West,  so  it  did  from  Ireland  to 
Scotland  and  London.  On  the  top  we  have  a  crown,  and  on 
the  top  of  this  we  have  a  lion.  On  the  first  quarter  are  three 
lions,  second  quarter  one,  on  the  third  a  stringed  harp  with  an 
angel’s  head,  and  on  the  fourth  three  lions,  the  total  of  lions 
nine,  and  an  unicorn.  The  fact  is,  this  standard,  had  we  time, 
teaches  a  world  of  history,  and  with  thePsalmist  we  may  say : 
“Thou  hast  given  a  banner  to  them  that  fear  Thee ;  that  it  may 
be  displayed  because  of  the  truth”  (Psa.  ix.  14).  The  gene¬ 
alogy  and  descent  of  King  Edward  from  Zedekiah  is  to  be  had. 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK 


89 


This  genealogy  has  been  completed  by  the  faithful  and  very 
persevering  labours  of  Rev.  F.  R.  A.  Glover,  M.A.,  and  Rev. 
A.  B.  Grimaldi,  M.  A.,  and  later  writers.  The  chart  is  supposed 
to  be  as  near  perfect  as  any  such  thing  can  be. 

Thus  do  we  see  how  God  has  kept  His  word  to  David,  and 
with  this  view,  English  and  American  history  are  at  once 
understandable.  The  future  is  assuring  and  grand.  God  will 
assuredly  overturn  till  His  throne  once  more  is  planted  in 
Jerusalem. 


Discourse  XVI. — Jeremiah  and  St.  Patrick. 

The  Prophet’s  Commission- — His  Life — The  Tribes  in  His 
Day — Landing  of  Jeremiah  in  Ireland — What  He 
Brought  With  Him — Colonization  of  Ireland — Jeremiah 
the  Founder  of  the  Ancient  Irish  Government  and  Re¬ 
ligion — Tea  Tephi  and  Heremon — The  Ancient  lush 
Flag — The  Harp  and  Lion — Season  of  Ireland’s  Histori¬ 
cal  Prestige — Causes  of  Her  Decline — St.  Patrick  a  Ben- 
jamite—How  Rome  Destroyed  Jeremiah’s  Memory 
Among  the  Irish — Destruction  of  Tara — Ulster  Never 
Conquered — Irish  Independence — Ark  of  the  Covenant. 

“See,  I  have  this  day  set  thee  over  the  nations  and  over  the  king¬ 
doms,  to  root  out,  and  to  pull  down,  and  to  destroy,  and  to  throw 
down,  to  build,  and  to  plant.” — Jer.  i.  10. 

In  these  words  we  have  set  forth  the  Divine  commission  given 
to  the  prophet  Jeremiah.  Never  before,  or  since,  was  such  a 
commission  given  to  mortal  man.  It  is  not  that  Jeremiah  is 
constituted  a  prophet  for  his  own  people,  or  over  his  own 
nation,  and  country,  but  he  was  divinely  appointed  and  set  over 
the  nations  and  kingdoms  of  the  earth,  with  an  authority  “to 
root  out,  pull  down,  destroy,  and  throw  down.”  Surely  he  was 
rightly  named,  for  the  word  Jeremiah  means  the  exalted,  or 
appointed  one  of  the  Lord.  By  common  consent,  the  Jews 
gave  him  the  first  place  and  name  among  the  prophets.  Up 
to  the  time  of  the  Babylonian  captivity  he  was  second,  Isaiah 
being  first.  But  after  the  captivity  on  the  re-arrangement  of  the 
holy  canon,  his  name  was  put  first,  and  ever  after  he  was  re- 
garded  and  accepted  as  the  patron  saint  of  Judaea.  He  was 
born  of  a  priestly  family,  about  641  b.c.,  in  the  priestly  town  of 
Anathoth,  which  was  situated  a  few  miles  North  of  Jerusalem, 
in  the  territory  of  Benjamin.  His  work  and  commission 
awaited,  because  they  antedated  his  birth,  for  he  says  (chapter 


00 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


i.  4),  “Then  the  word  of  the  Lord  came  unto  me,  saying, 
Before  I  formed  thee  in  the  belly  I  knew  thee;  and  before  thou 
earnest  forth  out  of  the  womb  I  sanctified  thee,  and  I  ordained 
thee  a  prophet  unto  the  nations.”  Jeremiah’s  life  work,  extent 
and  devotion,  can  only  find  a  parallel  in  the  majesty  and  com¬ 
pass  of  his  commission.  It  is  the  extent  of  this  commission 
that  I  wish  you  would  specially  notice,  for  it  is  neither  tribal 
nor  national  in  its  limitations.  He  was  ordained  a  prophet 
unto  the  nations.  Hear  the  voice  of  his  wailing  (chapter  xv. 
10),  “Woe  is  me,  my  mother,  that  thou  hast  borne  me  a  man 
of  strife  and  a  man  of  contention  to  the  whole  earth.” 

Consistent  with  the  vastness  of  this  commission  is  the  re¬ 
corded  fact  that  he  was  forbidden  to  marry  in  his  own  land, 
for  “the  word  of  the  Lord  came  unto  me,  saying,  Thou  shalt 
not  take  thee  a  wife,  neither  shalt  thou  have  sons  and  daugh¬ 
ters  in  this  place”  (Jeremiah  xvi.  2).  The  claims  of  a  wife  and 
cares  of  a  family  could  only  have  been  harshly  fitted  on  to  such 
a  work  and  commission.  Indeed,  every  peculiar  fact  in  the 
life  of  Jeremiah  may  be  best  accounted  for  by  taking  into  con¬ 
sideration  the  greatness  of  his  commission.  To  discard  this  is 
simply  to  invite  confusion,  and  yet,  strange  to  say,  many  prefer 
confusion  rather  than  admit  that  he  performed  the  role 
assigned  him  of  Heaven.  For  this  very  reason  writers,  even 
Jewish  historians,  are  at  a  loss  to  account  for  the  latter  half 
of  the  prophet’s  life.  They  do  not  seem  to  know  where  he 
spent  his  last  days ;  they  know  not  the  time,  manner,  nor  place 
of  his  death.  And  why,  you  ask?  We  answer,  because  they 
selfishly  and  persistently  limited  his  life  and  labours  to  his  own 
land.  They  have  not  been  willing  to  allow  that  he  was  set  as  a 
prophet  over  nations  and  kingdoms.  Then  again,  they  have 
been  willing  to  allow  him  to  be  a  puller  down  and  destroyer, 
but  not  a  builder  and  planter.  To  grant  that  he  was  a  builder 
and  planter,  would  have  obliged  them  to  have  found  the  place 
of  his  building  and  the  objects  of  his  planting.  These  they 
well  knew  could  not  be  found  in  Palestine,  and  they  were  as 
loath  as  many  are  unwilling  to-day  to  permit  Jeremiah  to  leave 
his  own  land.  A  man  who  would  be  equal  to  the  Bible  must 
be  large-hearted,  generous  and  free,  not  fettered  and  bound  by 
the  errors  of  youthful  training,  the  selfishness  of  sectarianism, 
the  bigotry  of  orthodoxy  or  the  indifference  of  infidelity,  but 
seek  the  truth,  no  matter  from  whence,  or  what  it  upsets  or 
overturns  of  preconceived  ideas.  The  command  is,  “Prove  all 
things  and  hold  fast  that  which  is  good.”  To  hear  some  peo¬ 
ple  talk  and  lament,  you  would  think  that  the  command  was, 
Prove  nothing,  but  hold  hard  on  to  what  you  have  got. 

Try  now,  and  reasonably  and  patiently  follow  me  while  I 
trace  the  wanderings  of  Jeremiah  to  Old  Ireland.  You  will 
be  surprised  to  find  how  intimate  Irishology  and  theology  are. 

Ireland  and  the  Tribe  of  Dan  have  a  peculiar  history,  which 
history  only  can  be  made  plain  by  reference  to  the  Bible.  Ire¬ 
land  has  had  much  to  undergo,  yet  of  it  God  says,  “To  the 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK 


91 


island  He  will  repay — recompense :  so  shall  they  fear  the 
name  of  the  Lord  from  the  West.” 

Ireland’s  first  name  was  Scuite’s  Land,  or  the  Island  of  the 
Wanderers.  Her  second  name  was  Scotia  Major,  and  Scot¬ 
land  was  Scotia  Minor,  and  England  was  Tarshish,  and  Dan- 
noii  and  Baratamac,  or  Land  of  Tin.  Yar  in-Eirin  means  the 
land  of  the  setting  sun.  Hibernia  is  a  Hebrew  word,  and  means 
from  beyond  the  river  or  waters. 

Two  colonies  settled  in  Ireland :  the  first,  the  Phoenicians, 
who  were  the  Philistines  or  ancient  Canaanites ;  the  second 
settlers  were  the  Tuath  de  Danan,  meaning  the  Tribe  of  Dan. 
The  words  are  Hebrew,  yet  in  Irish.  For  further  information 
let  anyone  read  “Pinnock’s  Catechism  on  Ireland.  ^  1  he 
Phoenicians  were  a  seafaring  people ;  pressed  by  Israel,  Egypt, 
and  Assyria,  they  finally  left  Canaan,  and  settled  in  Ireland. 
We  find  nine-tenths  of  Irish  historians  agreeing  on  this.  Then 
the  monuments  teach  the  same— ancient  inscriptions,  one  of 
which  written  was,  “We  are  Canaanites  who  have  fled  from 
Joshua,  the  son  of  Nun,  the  robber.”  The  people  who  show 
tourists  the  seven  churches  of  Glendenlough,  say  they  are 
Hittites  and  Hivites.  Again,  ruins  of  Baal  temples,  Crom¬ 
lechs,  round  towers,  go  to  confirm  the  same.  Customs  Baal 
fires, ’on  May  eve,  in  Irish  Ninna-baal-tinne ;  funeral  wakes,  or 
cup  of  consolation,  forbidden  to  Israel  when  they  sought  to 
copy  after  the  Philistines.  “Neither  shall  men  give  them  the 
cup  of  consolation  to  drink  for  father  or  mother”  (Jer.  xvi. 
7).  The  Irish  language  came  from  the  Phoenician,  the  alpha¬ 
bet  of  both  being  composed  of  sixteen  letters  originally,  the. 
only  alphabet  in  the  world  so  agreeing.  From  the  Irish  came 
the  Gaelic,  Welsh,  Cornish,  and  the  Manx  from  them  all. 

The  second  settlement  of  Ireland  is  what  puzzles  historians 
of  to-day — not  the  old  historians,  for  they,  nine  out  of  ten, 
admit  that  the  Formorians,  Firbolgs  and  Tuath  de  Danans, 
were  one  and  the  same  people.  They  were  a  divine  folk.  I  he 
Tribe  of  Dan  was  a  seafaring  Tribe,  trading  from  Tyre  to  lar- 
shish  for  tin,  and  so  became  acquainted  with  the  British  Isles, 
and  during  Ahab’s  persecution  many  of  them  fled;  so  of  the 
Simeonites  who  settled  in  Wales  This  shows  us  why  the 
North  and  South  of  Ireland  should  be  so  distinct  to  this  day 
in  religion,  enterprise  and  general  characteristics.  When  the 
tribe  of  Dan  finally  left  Palestine,  they  with  the  other  Nine 
Tribes  went  North,  settling  in  Denmark,  as  in  the  North  o 
Ireland,  leaving  their  names  on  rivers,  hills,  cities _and  1 thmgs. 

It  is  this  that  accounts  for  so  many  words  of  a  Heb  e 
origin  being  found  in  the  Irish  language.  General  Valiancy 
has  compared  thousands  and  finds  them  thus  related  to  the 

Hebrew  Instance:  Jobhan-Moran,  C0hief  Justlc^.  Rec^e’ 
fudge-  Mur-Ollam,  School  of  the  Prophets;  Ollam-Folla, 
Divine  Teacher;  Mergech,  a  Depository ;  Tara,  Law  lephi, 
Prince  of  the  East;  Lia-Fail,  Stone  of  Destiny;  Eben  Ge- 

doulah,  precious  stone. 


92 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


If  to  Irish  history  we  join  Bible  history,  all  is  plain.  God 
promised  David  repeatedly  that  he  should  always  have  his 
throne  and  on  it  his  seed.  The  permanence  of  David’s  throne 
makes  it  a  fit  type  of  Christ’s.  Now,  Jeremiah  took  charge  of 
Zedekiah’s  daughter  when  Nebuchadnezzar  took  the  Jews 
captive.  He  went  to  Egypt,  then  escaped,  God  promising  to 
keep  him  whithersoever  he  went.  So  he  disappears.  No  ac¬ 
count  of  his  death  in  the  Bible.  He  had  charge  of  the  ark  of 
the  covenant,  royal  seed  and  Jacob’s  pillow — the  stone  of 
Israel.  Irish  histories,  some  twenty  of  which  we  find  agree, 
say  that  about  585  b.c  a  divine  man  landed  in  Ulster,  having 
with  him  the  king’s  daughter,  stone  of  destiny,  and  ark,  and 
many  other  wonderful  things.  The  people  of  Ulster  of  Dan 
understood  the  old  adventurer.  Jeremiah  married  Tephi, 
Zedekiah’s  daughter,  to  Eochaid,  who  agreed  to  abandon  Baal 
worship  and  build  a  school  for  the  prophets.  So  he  did.  He 
then  assumed  the  title  of  Heremon  of  Tara.  Now,  at  Tara, 
Jeremiah  buried  the  ark  of  the  covenant,  tables  of  law,  etc. 
and  instituted  the  nine-arch  degree  of  Masonry,  to  keep  in 
mind  its  hiding-place — so  all  may  understand  Jer.  iii.  16  :  “And 
it  shall  come  to  pass,  when  ye  be  multiplied  and  increased  in 
the  land,  in  those  days,  saith  the  Lord :  they  shall  say  no  more, 
The  ark  of  the  covenant  of  the  Lord:  neither  shall  it  come  to 
mind ;  neither  shall  they  remember  it ;  neither  shall  they  visit 
it ;  neither  shall  that  be  done  any  more.”  This  means  that 
when  the  ark  is  found  the  ceremony  will  end ;  for  the  ark  has 
to  be  found  and  go  before  the  Jews  when  they  return  to  their 
own  land.  Jeremiah  was  the  first  Grand  Master.  He,  too,  is 
the  real  St.  Patrick — simply  the  Patriarchal  Saint,  which  be¬ 
came  St.  Patriarch,  then  St.  Patrick.  The  Roman  Church 
introduced  St.  Patrick  to  offset  the  St.  Patriarch. 

Jeremiah  well  knew  where  the  Tribes  of  Israel  were  in  his 
day.  He  knew  that  Judah,  Levi,  and  Benjamin,  were  in 
Babylon,  filling  in  the  seventy  years  of  captivity,  and  the  small 
remnant  that  Nebuchadnezzar  left  of  them  in  Judah  were 
scattered  hither  and  thither.  The  Nine  Tribes,  or  Israel,  were 
settled  in  Central  Asia,  and  were  spreading  Northward  and 
Westward.  This  he  knew,  as  easily  as  Peter  did  centuries 
after,  when  he  wrote  his  epistle  to  the  brethren,  scattered 
abroad  in  Pontus,  Galatia,  Cappadocia,  and  Asia;  or  as  James, 
who  dedicated  his  epistle  to  the  Twelve  Tribes  which  were 
scattered  abroad ;  or  as  the  Blessed  Master,  commissioned  and 
sent  His  disciples  after  the  lost  sheep  of  the  House  of  Israel. 
The  place  and  locality  of  the  Nine  Tribes  were  known  to  the 
Jewish  nation  in  the  time  of  Josephus,  the  historian,  for  he 
speaks  of  them,  and  gives  them  a  fraternal  letter  which  the 
House  of  Judah  sent  unto  the  House  of  Israel.  You  are  to 
keep  in  mind  that  it  is  after  this  the  Tribes  of  Israel  are  to 
be  lost.  All  prophecies  after  700  b.c  up  to  this,  our  day,  and 
till  about  1882  a.d.,  that  had  reference  to  Israel,  plainly  mark 
out  the  dwelling-place  of  these  Tribes,  and  yet  these  prophecies 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK 


93 


not  being  understood,  till  these  latter  days,  Israel  was  as  plainly 
lost  as  if  there  had  been  no  such  prophecies.  These  proph¬ 
ecies  were  first  sent  North,  then  West,  and  then  to  the  “isles  of 
the  sea.”  The  law  of  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  would  be  sent  to  these 
Tribes:  till  then  the  “isles  had  to  wait  for  the  law.”  In  due 
time  this  law  was  carried  to  them  by  the  missionary  Tribe  of 
Benjamin.  This  very  thing  and  time  the  prophet  had  fore¬ 
told,  for  he  says :  “Wherefore  glorify  ye  the  Lord  by  the 
Urim;  the  name  of  the  Lord  God  of  Israel  in  the  islands  of  the 
Western  sea.”  How  true,  indeed,  “the  isles  of  the  sea  saw  it, 
and  feared.”  Jeremiah  knew  that  the  Tribe  of  Dan  were  a 
seafaring  people,  and  in  their  trading  they  had  become  ac¬ 
quainted  with  Northern  Kurope  and  the  British  Isles.  Dur¬ 
ing  the  persecutions  of  Ahab  thousands  of  them  had  left  Pales¬ 
tine,  settling  in  Denmark — this  word  Denmark  means  the 
circle  of  Dan.  In  course  of  time  they  crossed  the  sea  and  took 
possession  of  the  North  of  Ireland,  settling  in  the  province 
of  Ulster.  The  Tribe  of  Simeon,  that  had  ever  cast  its  lot 
with  Dan,  left  Palestine  and  settled  in  Wales.  Read  the  pro¬ 
phetic  benedictions  of  the  patriarch  Jacob  in  the  light  of 
these  historical  facts,  and  they  will  stand  out  in  sunlight 
brightness.  “Dan  shall  judge  his  people  as  one  of  the  Tribes 
of  Israel.”  In  his  oneness ,  all  alone  he  shall  go  out  first,  mark 
out  and  prepare  the  way  of  the  other  Tribes ;  and  the  royal 
seed,  the  ruling  power,  shall  hide  itself  in  him.  Dan  shall 
be  a  serpent  by  the  way ;  an  adder  in  the  path  that  biteth  the 
horse’s  heels  so  that  his  rider  shall  fall  backward.”  Yes,  Dan 
will  be  hid  among  the  Gentiles.  He  will  bite  them,  sting  them, 
frustrating  their  purposes.  Then  exclaims .  Jacob :  ‘  I  have 
waited  for  Thy  salvation,  O  Lord.”  Dan  did  wait,  until  the 
prophet  Jeremiah  landed  in  his  midst  with  Tea  Tephi,  the 
daughter  of  Zedekiah,  the  royal  seed,  with  the  ark  of  the 
covenant,  the  tables  of  the  law,  the  Urim  and  Thummim, 
which  would  enable  Dan  to  judge  his  people,  with  the  stone  of 
Jacob,  the  pillar  witness,  which  is  now  in  the  royal  chair  in 
Westminster  Abbey;  and  also  with  the  standard  of  Judah. 
Thus  the  prophet,  who  was  the  rightful  custodian  of  all  these 
things,  carefully  cared  for  the  same,  leaving  them  in  charge 
of  Dan.  All  but  the  stone  have  been  concealed  till  the  latter 
day.  For  on  this  stone  have  been  crowned  all  the  kings  and 

queens  of  David’s  line.  .  u  T  •  u 

Now  just  here  we  must  take  up  history— especially  Irish 
history— for  in  this  matter  and  at  this  very  point,  you  will  find 
profane  and  sacred  histories  agreeing.  One  will  beautifully 
explain  the  other ;  nor  can  anybody  understand  Irish  history 
unless  they  get  the  key  from  sacred  history.  To  take  this  key 
later  writers  have  been  unwilling,  and,  therefore,  they  have 
been  unable  to  solve  the  problem  embodied  in  this  race  and 
nation.  No  people  on  the  face  of  the  earth  have  been  less 
understood  and  more  misrepresented.  The  real  al  ophy Ilians  of 
Ireland,  that  is,  the  first  native  settlers,  are  unknown,  lhe 


94 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


present  inhabitants  are  not  autochthonal,  no  more  than  we  are 
the  first  settlers  of  this  country.  On  one  point  all  old  historians 
are  agreed — namely,  that  Ireland  has  been  settled  by  two  dis¬ 
tinct  colonies  of  people;  and  from  these  two  colonies  come  the 
present  Irish  race.  These  two  colonies  were  distinct  in  fea¬ 
tures,  manners,  customs,  enterprise  and  religion,  and  after  all 
these  centuries  have  passed  away,  these  differences  are  discern¬ 
ible  in  some  degree,  especially  so  in  enterprise  and  religion. 
And  though,  of  course  in  these  latter  years  they  have  become 
considerably  mixed,  yet  an  appeal  on  either  of  these  points  will 
mark  out  the  Danite  from  the  Phoenician. 

The  Phoenicians,  or  Philistines,  were  the  ancient  Canaanites. 
They  took  early  possession  of  Ireland.  On  this  point  the  old 
as  well  as  the  new  historians  generally  agree.  But  there  was 
another  early  settlement  in  the  North  of  Ireland,  whom  the 
historians  called  Tuath  de  Danan,  which  simply  means  the 
folks  of  the  Tribe  of  Dan.  They  introduced  into  the  Irish  lan¬ 
guage  hundreds  of  Plebrew  words,  with  many  customs  and 
legends  of  the  Hebrews.  They  were  very  distinct  in  their 
enterprise  and  religion  from  the  other  settlers.  About  the  year 
580  b.c.  there  appeared  before  this  people  a  strange  man, 
whom  the  historians  call  Ollam-F olla,  which  means  a  Divine 
teacher;  the  name  or  title  is  in  Hebrew.  This  man,  whoever 
he  was,  soon  wielded  great  power  in  their  midst.  What  he 
commanded  they  seemed  ready  to  do.  He  very  soon  inaugurated 
wonderful  reforms.  He  gave  them  a  parliament;  made  them 
give  up  their  idolatrous  customs.  He  founded  a  college  to 
train  students  to  teach  and  preach  his  religion.  It  was  called 
Mur-Ollam,  school  of  the  Divine.  Here  again  the  name  is  He¬ 
brew,  although  in  Irish.  This  wonderful  man  had  with  him  a 
fair  young  princess,  whose  name  in  Hebrew-Irish  was  Tea- 
Tephi,  which  means  the  beautiful  one  from  the  East.  This 
lovely  princess  was  married  to  the  governor  of  Ulster,  Here- 
mon.  He  resided  in  the  city  of  Lothair  Crofffn.  In  the  agree¬ 
ment  of  the  marriage,  among  many  things,  he  was  to  accept 
her  religion,  give  her  joint  authority,  and  build  the  Mur-Ollam, 
or  college,  and  sustain  it.  Also  to  change  the  name  of  the  city 
from  Lothair  Croffin  to  Tara,  which  means  law;  to  adopt  her 
standard  or  banner  emblem,  the  harp  and  lion,  and  to  be 
crowned  on  the  wonderful  stone  called  in  Irish-Hebrew,  Lia- 
Fail,  which  means  stone  of  destiny,  sometimes  called  Eben 
Gedoulah,  the  precious  stone.  From  this  Tea  Tephi  we  get  our 
female  goddess  of  liberty,  who  on  old  coins  is  seated  upon 
a  lion  with  the  Davidian  harp  in  her  hand. 

Our  text  tells  us  that  Jeremiah  was  to  plant  and  build  up. 
Here  he  planted,  and  here  he  did  build.  He  planted  and  built 
a  throne,  a  college,  and  a  religion.  Turn  to  Ezekiel,  chapter 
xvii.,  and  read  the  famous  riddle.  Tea  Tephi  is  the  tender  twig 
that  was  cropped  off  from  the  high  cedar,  King  Zedekiah,  and 
planted  among  the  merchants  by  great  waters  on  the  mountain 
of  Israel.  She  was  the  tender  one  that  was  to  take  root  down- 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK 


95 


ward.  To  Jeremiah  the  Lord  said,  “Verily  it  shall  be  well 
with  thy  remnant.”  Nay,  more,  He  told  him  that  He  would 
give  him  his  life  for  a  prey  whithersoever  he  went.  And  in  2 
Kings  xix.  30,  we  read:  “And  the  remnant  that  is  escaped  of 
the  House  of  Judah  shall  yet  again  take  root  downward  and 
bear  fruit  upward.  For  out  of  Jerusalem  shall  go  forth  a  rem¬ 
nant,  and  they  that  escape  out  of  Mount  Zion ;  the  zeal  of  the 
Lord  of  hosts  shall  do  this.”  And  Ezekiel,  in  his  captivity, 
sent  forth  a  prophecy  referring  to  the  wicked  prince  Zedekiah, 
saying  of  his  throne  in  the  name  of  Jehovah:  “I  will  overturn, 
overturn,  overturn  it,  and  it  shall  be  no  more  until  He  come 
whose  right  it  is,  and  I  will  give  it  Him.”  So  was  this  throne 
overturned,  and  was  never  after  established  in  Jerusalem. 
You  will  notice  that  there  are  three  overturnings,  and  as  Scrip¬ 
tural  language  is  emphatic  and  not  superfluous  or  tautological, 
these  overturnings  mean  something.  Turn  to  history,  and  you 
will  find  this  throne  has  been  turned  over  just  three  times 
first,  from  Jerusalem  to  Ireland ;  second,  through  King  Fergus 
to  Scotland;  and  third,  through  King  James,  from  Scotland  to 
England.  This  throne  can  never  be  turned  over  again,  for 
Jerusalem  will  be  incorporated  into  the  British  Empire.  The 
throne  has  turned  over  till  it  got  home  again ;  hence,  as  surely 
as  we  live,  Palestine  will  go  into  the  hands  of  England.  The 
throne,  religion  and  education  established  by  the  prophet  have 
ever  kept  together.  This  is  the  secret  of  Ireland  s  prestige  and 
marvellous  pre-eminence  in  centuries  past..  The  college  of 
Armagh  could  boast  of  7,000  students  at  a  time.  Missionaries 
went  forth  from  Ireland  through  all  Europe,  teaching  Christi¬ 
anity  and  founding  schools.  Few  men  can  compare  to  Virgilus, 
Erigina,  Columbanus,  and  Columba.  In  olden  times  she  was 
known  as  the  “Isle  of  the  Saints.”  The  day  of  Ireland  s  weak¬ 
ness  and  distress  came  to  her  when  she  permitted  her  religion 
to  be  corrupted  and  controlled  by  foreigners ;  and  by  these 
same  Italian  intriguers  she  is  now  impoverished  and  enslaved. 
But  for  this  the  throne  might  have  remained  with  her  to-day, 
and  England  and  Scotland  have  been  under  her.  But  when 
a  nation  loses  her  religion,  she  loses  the  right  arm  of  pow^r, 

and  the  ability  to  preserve  freedom. 

Jeremiah  was  the  patron-saint  for  Ireland  for  a  long  tune. 
Simeon  the  Welsh  had  and  have  David;  and  as  surely  as  the 
Welsh  have  kept  their  samt,  so  surely  ought  Ireland.  -  • 
Patrick  is  looked  upon  by  many  as  a  mythical  persom  ^  be¬ 
lieve  however,  that  he  was  a  veritable  man.  The  best  autho 
tiel  make  out  that  he  was  born  at  Bonavena,  m  ancient  Gaul, 
near  what  is  now  called  Boulogne,  some  time  about  387a.d. 
He  is  reported  as  having  died  March  17th,  465  in  the  county 
Down.  His  father’s  name  was  Calpumius  Young  Ca^ 

__  c:*-  Patrick  as  he  was  afterwards  called,  had  a  nara 
SfTofitta  “’Relieve  him  to  have  been  a  Benjarntte  a 
Christian-  for  the  Benjamites  began  to  fill  m  that  part  oi 
France  about  that  perih.  This  Tribe  were  by  nature  mts- 


96 


THE  LOST  TEN  TRIBES. 


sionaries.  This  prompted  him  to  desire  to  redeem  his  brethren 
in  Ireland.  In  Ulster  he  began  his  labours.  From  this  same 
Tribe  others  had  visited  Ireland.  History  mentions  four  who 
preceded  St.  Patrick.  The  name  of  St.  Paul,  by  many,  is  con¬ 
nected  with  a  visit  to  Ireland.  It  is  very  easy  to  see  how 
Jeremiah,  the  patron-saint  of  Judah,  would  be  installed  in  such 
a  relation  with  the  Danites  after  his  death.  He  was  the  real 
sainted  patriarch  of  Ireland.  And  by  a  crafty  design  of  Rome 
young  Calpurnius  was  created  sainted  patriarch,  or  St.  Pat¬ 
rick,  and  by  this  means  Rome  linked  the  greater  part  of  the 
Irish  nation  on  to  herself.  Anybody  honest  and  familiar  with 
history,  knows  that  St.  Patrick  was  a  Christian,  and  in  no 
sense  of  the  word  a  Roman  Catholic.  The  fact  is,  Rome  be¬ 
gan  early  to  covet  Ireland.  Once  they  got  possession,  it  was 
necessary  for  them  to  destroy  the  influence  of  Jeremiah.  This 
they  did,  in  part,  by  substituting  the  name  of  St.  Patrick  in  the 
place  of  the  prophets ;  and  more,  they  then  set  work  to  destroy 
even  the  old  and  famous  capital  city  of  Tara.  In  565  St.  Ruad- 
ham,  along  with  a  posse  of  bishops  and  chiefs  of  the  South  of 
Ireland,  cursed  the  city,  so  that  neither  King  nor  Queen  might 
ever  rule  or  reign  therein  again.  They  forced  the  govern¬ 
ment,  monarchy  and  people  to  abandon  the  place.  F rom  thence 
Tara  was  deserted,  and  the  harp  sounded  no  more  through 
Tara’s  halls.  The  city  thus  cursed  crumbled  to  ruins,  and  re¬ 
mains  to  this  day  buried,  awaiting  a  glorious  resurrection. 
Rome  caught  her  prize  at  last ;  but  neither  Rome  nor  any 
other  power  ever  enslaved  or  conquered  Ulster.  Beyond  the 
pale — that  is,  the  dividing  line,  running  from  the  Boyne  to 
the  Shannon — Rome  never  got,  nor  never  will.  Irishmen 
clamour  for  independence,  to  be  free  from  England,  and 
wonder  why  they  are  not.  The  reason  is  that  God  cannot  trust 
liberty  to  them ;  for  a  people  that  yoke  themselves  to  a  for¬ 
eigner,  and  give  themselves  over  to  be  governed  in  spiritual 
matters,  would  make  a  poor  effort  if  trusted  with  their  tem¬ 
poral  government.  We  all  know  that  if  Ireland  had  been 
free,  she  would  not  long  have  remained  so,  for  body,  as  well  as 
soul,  she  would  have  committed  to  Rome.  Why  Irish  Catholics 
should  ask  for  freedom  when  they  so  voluntarily  bind  them¬ 
selves  to  a  foreigner  I  fail  to  see.  As  the  Protestants  of  the 
North  have  asked,  and  had  granted,  spiritual  freedom  in  the 
severance  of  Church  and  State,  so  let  the  men  of  the  South  ask 
and  demand,  and  stop  not  short  of  freedom  from  Rome.  A 
free  religion  is  the  parent  of  a  free  State,  and  a  free  State  of 
free  School.  A  people  who  are  not  wise  enough  to  take  care  of 
their  own  religion,  are  very  poorly  prepared  to  be  the  guardians 
of  liberties.  Once  Ireland  becomes  free  religiously,  it  will  not 
be  long  before  she  will  be  free  politically.  Substitute  Jeremiah 
for  St.  Patrick,  and  the  L^rd  Jesus  for  the  Pope,  then  the  day 
of  freedom  will  not  long  tarry. 


Books 


on  Prophecy,  Anglo -Israel 
and  Related  Subjects 


JUDAH’S  SCEPTRE  AND  JOSEPH’S  BIRTHRIGHT 

An  Analysis  of  the  Prophecies  of  Scripture  Concern¬ 
ing  the  Royal  House  of  Judah  and  the  Many  Nations 
of  Israel,  The  Lost  Ten  Tribes.  By  Rev.  J.  H.  Allen  $1.60 

“Rev.  J.  H.  Allen  has  logically  and  with  compelling  inter¬ 
est  presented  a  new  and  startling  theory  which  if  true 
would  link  the  history  of  the  chosen  people  of  the  Scrip¬ 
tures  with  the  Anglo-Saxon  race  of  to-day  and  insure  to 
the  nations  of  Great  Britain  and  the  United  States,  the 
fulfillment  of  the  promises  which  were  made  to  “Israel” 
in  the  Bible. 

It  is  clearly  recognized  among  all  thoughtful  students 
of  the  Scriptures  that  a  profound  story  is  seeking  to  reveal 
itself  under  the  type  or  allegory  of  “The  Twelve  Tribes 
of  Israel,”  and  that  this  story  pervades  the  Bible  from 
Genesis  to  Revelation.  Dr.  Allen  shows  by  indisputable 
logic  that  although  the  prophecies  made  for  Judah  (the 
Jews)  have  been  largely  fulfilled,  those  more  far-reach¬ 
ing  ones  declared  for  “Israel”  have  not  been  recognized 
as  applying  to  any  of  the  nations  of  the  earth  to-day.  It 
is  both  startling  and  fascinating  to  be  told  that  those 
nations  of  these  modern  days  which  have  taken  the  lead 
in  the  struggle  for  human  rights  and  liberty  of  conscience 
and  action  are  the  direct  descendants  of  those  ten  tribes 
of  Israel  which  have  been  considered  as  “lost”  since  their 
captivity  and  banishment  before  the  dawn  of  the  Chris¬ 
tian  era.  If  Dr.  Allen  has  sustained  his  case,  it  really 
means  that  in  the  United  States  and  in  Great  Britain 
are  being  worked  out  the  problems  of  human  relationship, 
of  Capital  and  Labor,  of  religious  toleration  and  coopera¬ 
tion  for  the  highest  ideals  which  must  ultimate  in  that 
unity  of  desire  and  action  which  was  foreseen  by  the 
patriarchs,  prophets,  and  disciples  of  Bible  days  and 
by  the  great  leaders  of  thought  in  more  modern  times, 
as  the  final  accomplishment  of  human  history,  even  the 
prelude  to  the  millennium.” 


Any  of  the  above  books  sent  post-paid  on  receipt 

of  order  by 

A-  A.  BEAUCHAMP 

603  BOYLSTON  STREET,  BOSTON,  MASS.,  U.  S.  A. 


Books  on  Prophecy,  Anglo- Israel 
and  Related  Subjects 


ISRAEL  YESTERDAY  AND  TO-DAY 

By  A.  E.  Wormley 

Every  student  of  prophetic  Scriptures  regardless  of  creed 
or  sect  should  read  and  ponder  the  message  contained  in 
this  volume . $1.00 

HISTORY  UNVEILING  PROPHECY 

By  William  Reeve 

The  facts  of  history  illuminated  by  the  Bible,  the  Great 
Pyramid  and  the  Coronation  Stone.  The  author  has  some 
interesting  conclusions  regarding  the  measurements 
indicated  in  the  Great  Pyramid.  He  states  that  the  year 
1910  “is  no  less  than  the  close  of  this  dispensation  of 
grace  and  the  commencement  of  Judgment  upon  the 
nations.”  . .  $1.00 

THE  CORONATION  STONE 

By  Mrs.  G.  Albert  Rogers 

A  record  of  the  “Stone  of  the  Covenant”  or  “Jacob’s 
Pillar  Stone,”  now  used  in  the  “Coronation”  chair  in 
which  the  Kings  of  England  are  crowned . $  .75 

THE  SCIENTIFIC  AND  RELIGIOUS  DISCOVERIES 
IN  THE  GREAT  PYRAMID.  Made  by  C.  Piazzi 
Smyth. 

By  William  H.  Wilson 

The  best  exposition  in  a  small  compass  of  the  discoveries 
made  in  the  Great  Pyramid . $1.00 

THE  GREAT  PYRAMID  INSIDE  AND  OUTSIDE 

By  H.  St.  Delmas  $  .50 

A  MIRACLE  IN  STONE,  OR  THE  GREAT  PYRAMID 
OF  EGYPT 

By  Joseph  A.  Seiss,  D.  D.  $1.50 

ISRAEL  IN  BRITAIN 

By  Col.  Garnier 

A  brief  statement  of  the  evidences  in  proof  of  the  Israel- 
itish  origin  of  the  English  race . $  .25 


Any  of  the  above  books  sent  post-paid  on  receipt 

of  order  by 

A.  A.  BEAUCHAMP 

603  BOYLSTON  STREET,  BOSTON,  MASS.,  U.  S.  A. 


Books  on  Prophecy,  Anglo -Israel 
and  Related  Subjects 


GOD’S  NATION 

By  Rev.  J.  M.  Simpson 

The  author  presents  conclusive  evidence  that  the  Anglo- 
Saxons  are  the  lost  tribes.  He  declares  ti  at  if  “Great 
Britain  and  the  United  States  of  America  stand  to¬ 
gether  they  can  dictate  terms  to  the  world  and  if  they 
stand  together  for  Christ  (which  they  must  do  if  true 
to  their  divine  mission),  then  the  terms  which  they  shall 
dictate  shall  be  righteous,  then  will  come  the  promised 
time  of  universal  peace  when  nation  shall  not  lift  up 
sword  against  nation,  neither  shall  they  make  war  any 
more.”  . $1.25 


THE  ANGELS  OF  ISRAEL  AT  MONS  AND  YPRES 

By  A.  E.  Wormley 

Much  has  been  written  concerning  the  visions  of  the 
angels  that  appeared  to  the  soldiers  of  the  allies  and 
especially  of  the  British  army  at  the  battles  of  Mons  and 
Ypres  in  August,  1914.  Only  to  the  true  Israelite  is  the 
vital  meaning  of  that  great  event  revealed . _•  •  $  -40 


THE  VISIONS  OF  MONS  AND  YPRES 

An  account  of  the  remarkable  phenomena 


$  .25 


THE  KINGDOM  OF  GOD 

By  Charles  Wesley  Eakeley 

The  author  shows  the  “Stone  Kingdom”  of  Daniel  to 
be  the  Kingdom  of  Israel.  Jesus  said  he  was  “not  sent 
but  to  the  lost  sheep  of  the  house  of  Israel.”  Where  the 
house  of  Israel  was  at  that  time  forms  an  interesting 
part  of  this  important  book,  one  that  every  Jew  and 
Zionist  should  read  as  well  as  those  interested  in  Anglo- 
Israel . * 

PROPHECY  AND  HISTORY 

By  Charles  Wesley  Eakeley 

A  pamphlet  containing  “The  Conflict  between  the  Roman 
Eagles  and  the  Lion  of  the  Tribe  of  Judah  for  World 
Dominion”  and  other  essays  relating  to  the  high  destiny 
of  Israel,  the  Stone  Kingdom,  etc . . . $ 


.80 


.30 


FIFTY  REASONS  _  ,  T 

Why  the  Anglo-Saxons  are  Israelites  ot  the  Lost 

Tribes  of  the  House  of  Israel. 

By  Rev.  W.  H.  Poole,  D.  D.  $  .25 

THE  HOUSE  OF  ISRAEL  FOUND  IN  THE  BRITISH 
EMPIRE  AND  AMERICA 

By  Rev.  John  Gawthorp  $  -50 


Any  of  the  above  books  sent  post-paid  on  receipt 

of  order  by 

A.  A.  BEAUCHAMP 

603  BOYLSTON  STREET,  BOSTON,  MASS.,  U.  S.  A. 


The 

Watchman  of  Israel 

A  MONTHLY  MAGAZINE  IN  THE 
INTEREST  OF  ANGLO-ISRAEL 

This  publication  will  emphasize  the  importance  of 
the  union  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  race  and  will  endeavor 
to  do  its  part  in  establishing  the  truth  in  regard  to 
the  real  Scriptural  identity  of  the  English  speaking 
peoples.  Suitable  original  matter  from  students  of 
“Anglo-Israel”  will  be  welcomed  in  the  columns  of 
this  new  periodical.  It  is  expected  that  important 
contributions  on  this  subject  which  have  appeared 
in  the  past  will  be  reviewed  or  re-published.  The 
whole  subject  of  “Anglo-Israel”  and  kindred  ques¬ 
tions  relating  to  the  prophetic  Scriptures  will  be 
considered  and  handled  from  a  standpoint  unfettered 
by  precedent  and  unaffected  as  far  as  possible  by 
scholastic  or  historical  tradition.  There  are  thou¬ 
sands  of  thinking  people  who  are  today  awakening 
to  the  momentous  fact  that  men  and  nations  are  not 
the  creatures  of  chance  and  change,  but  that  God  has 
never  been  without  a  witness.  The  divine  chain  of 
the  ages  is  leading  the  thought  of  the  world  steadily 
toward  the  recognition  that  the  destiny  of  mankind 
rests  upon  the  awakening  thought  of  the  great  Eng¬ 
lish  speaking  people  whose  ideals  have  always  been 
the  same  and  therefore  who  have  never  been  really 
separated.  Thus  out  of  “Ephraim  and  Manasseh” 
shall  the  world  come  to  recognize  that  the  LAW 
must  go  forth  which  shall  awaken  Israel  and  bring 
to  the  practical  fulfillment  the  prophetic  vision  of 
those  throughout  the  ages  who  have  been  chosen  to 
declare  God’s  Word. 

$2.00  per  year  Single  Copy,  25  Cents 

Address  all  communications  to 

A.  A.  BEAUCHAMP 

603  Boylston  Street  Boston,  Massachusetts 


